THE A L DINE METHOD 
 
 AMANUAL 
 
 Aldine First Language Book 
 
 UC-NRLF 
 
 *B 3DS 3bl * 
 
 ■■■■ 
 
 liiiiiUiiHsiu; 
 
 SPAULDING 
 
 1 
 
 ill I 
 
 NEWSON & COMPANY 
 
 Hi (II II I 111 11 ! 
 

 
 GIFT OF 
 H.D -LINQUIST 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2008 with funding from 
 
 Microsoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/aldinefirstlanguOOfranrich 
 
ALDINE 
 FIRST LANGUAGE BOOK 
 
 A MANUAL FOR TEACHERS 
 
 BY 
 
 FRANK E. SPAULDING 
 
 SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS, NEWTON, MASS. 
 AND 
 
 CATHERINE T. BRYCE 
 
 SUPERVISOR OF PRIMARY SCHOOLS, NEWTON, MASS. 
 
 COMPLIMENTS 
 
 OP 
 
 JJEWSON & COMPANY 
 
 NEWSON & COMPANY 
 NEW YORK 
 

 
 <? 
 
 .0' 
 
 Copyright, 1913, by 
 NEWSON & COMPANY. 
 
 All rights reserved, 
 
 1377 GHt 
 
 K.D-L1NQUIST 
 
 EDUCATION DEPT. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Introduction i 
 
 Chapter One 7 
 
 I. Reading 8 
 
 II. Teaching Pupils to Study 9 
 
 III. Conversation: Questions and Answers . . .11 
 
 IV. Dramatizing the Fable, "Grand Tusk and Nimble" . 14 
 V. Oral Reproduction of the Story .... 16 
 
 VI. Finishing a Story . . . . . . .18 
 
 VII. Oral Reproduction and Completion of Uncompleted 
 
 Story ......... 20 
 
 VIII. Telling Original Stories 21 
 
 IX. Reading a Story in a Picture 23 
 
 Supplementary Work 27 
 
 X. More Picture Stories 28 
 
 XI. Learning to Describe . . . . . 31 
 
 XII. Games of Description 31 
 
 XIII. Getting the Story from the Poem, "The Mountain 
 
 and the Squirrel " ...... 32 
 
 XIV. Telling the Story of the Poem 34 
 
 Chapter Two 35 
 
 I. Reading . . 36 
 
 II. Studying the Story of the Linden .... 37 
 
 III. Conversation and Dramatizing ..... 38 
 
 IV. Oral Reproduction of the Story of the Linden . . 42 
 V. Telling True Stories ....... 44 
 
 VI. Sentences, Capitals, Statements, and Periods . . 46 
 VII. Copying Sentences to Learn the Use of Capitals and 
 
 Period 48 
 
 VIII. Studied Dictation for Drill in Use of Capitals and 
 
 Period 50 
 
 iii 
 
 R7K7QA 
 
iv CONTENTS 
 
 PACU 
 
 IX. Unstudied Dictation to Test the Use of Capitals 
 
 and Period 52 
 
 X. Questions and the Question Mark .... 53 
 XI. Copying Questions to Learn the Use of Capitals 
 
 and the Question Mark 53 
 
 XII. Using Capitals and the Period .... 54 
 
 XIII. Picture Stories 54 
 
 Supplementary Work 56 
 
 XIV. More Picture Stories . . . ... 58 
 
 Supplementary Work 59 
 
 XV. Telling True Stories 59 
 
 XVI. Studying the Poem, "Spring Waking" . . . 60 
 
 XVII. Part Reading and Dramatizing the Poem . . 61 
 
 XVIII. Learning to Tell a Story 62 
 
 XIX. Oral Reproductions .63 
 
 Chapter Three 64 
 
 I. Reading the Story, "Mabel and the Fairy Folk" . 65 
 
 II. Dramatizing "Mabel and the Fairy Folk" . . 67 
 
 III. Oral Questions 68 
 
 Supplementary Work 70 
 
 IV. Writing Questions . . . . . 70 
 
 Supplementary Work 71 
 
 V. How Titles are Written 72 
 
 VI. Copying a Story 72 
 
 VII.* Dictation: " The Trees and the Woodcutter " . 7^ 
 
 VIII. Copying Titles 74 
 
 Supplementary Work 75 
 
 IX. Writing Titles from Dictation .... 75 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 75 
 
 X. Giving Titles to Pictures 76 
 
 XL Picture Stories 76 
 
 Supplementary Work 78 
 
 XII. More Picture Stories 78 
 
 XIII. Telling True Stories 80 
 
 XIV. A Class Exercise in Written Reproduction . . 80 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 84 
 
 XV. Copying Story from the Board .... 84 
 
CONTENTS v 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XVI. Studying a Poem 84 
 
 XVII. Writing a Stanza from Memory .... 85 
 
 Chapter Four 86 
 
 I. Study and Oral Reproduction of the Fable, " The 
 
 Four Oxen " 87 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 89 
 
 II. Their and There 89 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 90 
 
 III. Writing the Story, u The Four Oxen" ... 91 
 
 Supplementary Work 94 
 
 IV. The Use of Capitals in Writing the Names of Per- 
 
 sons 94 
 
 V. The Game of Names 95 
 
 VI. Writing Names .96 
 
 Supplementary Work 96 
 
 VII. Copying 96 
 
 VIII. Dictation 97 
 
 IX. The Use of Two, Too, and To .... 97 
 Supplementary Work . . . . -99 
 X. Dictation to Drill and Test the Use of Too, To, 
 
 Their, and There 99 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .100 
 
 XI. Enlarging a Story for Dramatizing ; Pupils 1 Prepara- 
 tory Study 101 
 
 XII. Enlarging a Story for Dramatizing; Class Exercise 102 
 
 XIII. Dramatizing the Story, "The First Buttercups" . 104 
 
 Supplementary Work 105 
 
 XIV. Picture Stories 105 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .105 
 
 XV. More Picture Stories 106 
 
 Supplementary Work 106 
 
 XVI. Telling True Stories 107 
 
 XVII. Studying a Poem 107 
 
 XVIII. Telling a Story from a Poem 107 
 
 Chapter Five 109 
 
 I. Reading ........ 109 
 
 II. Studying the Story, « The Little White Flower " . no 
 
vi CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 III. Conversation and Dramatizing in 
 
 IV. Oral Reproduction 113 
 
 V. Quotations . . . . . . . . 113 
 
 Supplementary Work 116 
 
 VI. Copying to Learn the Writing of Quotations . .116 
 VII. Dictation to Teach the Writing of Quotations . . 117 
 
 VIII. Finishing a Story Orally 122 
 
 Supplementary Work 124 
 
 IX. Finishing a Story in Writing 124 
 
 Supplementary Work 125 
 
 X. Words that can be Used in Place of Said . . .125 
 XI. Questions for You . . . . . . .128 
 
 XII. Picture Stories 128 
 
 Supplementary Work 131 
 
 XIII. More Picture Stories 132 
 
 Supplementary Work . . ... . . 136 
 
 XIV. Studying a Poem 136 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . 137 
 
 XV. Memorizing a Poem 137 
 
 Chapter Six 139 
 
 I. Further Study of Quotations ; Capital I . . . 141 
 II. Copying to Learn the Writing of Quotations and the 
 
 Capital I 142 
 
 III. Pupils' Study in Preparation for Dictation . . 143 
 
 IV. Testing and Teaching through Dictation . . . 145 
 V. Unstudied Dictation .......' 146 
 
 VI. A Written Reproduction 147 
 
 VII. Summary of the Uses of Capitals .... 147 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .148 
 
 VIII. A Written Exercise on the Use of Capitals . . 148 
 IX. Reading 148 
 
 X. Studying the Story, "The Star Visitor" . . .149 
 XI. Dramatizing the Story, "The Star Visitor" . . 149 
 
 XII. Writing a Conversation in Dialogue Form . .149 
 
 XIII. Picture Stories 150 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .152 
 
 XIV. More Picture Stories 152 
 
 Supplementary Work 152 
 
CONTENTS vil 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XV. Studying a Poem 155 
 
 XVI. Telling the Story from the Poem . . . .155 
 XVII. Playing " One, Two, Three " 155 
 
 Chapter Seven 157 
 
 I. Studying a Story ; Quotations Reviewed ; Capitals to 
 
 begin Days of the Week . . . . 159 
 
 II. Dictation, Studied and Unstudied . . . .161 
 
 III. The Days of the Week; Origin of their Names; 
 
 Abbreviations; Use of Capitals . . .161 
 
 IV. Original Exercise involving the Writing of the Days 
 
 of the Week in Full and Abbreviated . .162 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .163 
 
 V. A Story from a Rhyme; The Apostrophe to Denote 
 
 Possession . . . . . . -163 
 
 Supplementary Work . .. . . .164 
 
 VI. Reproducing a Story from Different Standpoints . 166 
 
 Supplementary Work 169 
 
 VII. Possessives 169 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .170 
 
 VIII. Unstudied Dictation 170 
 
 IX. Studying a Poem . . . . . . -171 
 
 X. Dramatizing the Poem, "When the Little Boy Ran 
 
 Away' 1 174 
 
 XI. Writing a Dialogue 175 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .176 
 
 XII. Finishing a Story . . .' . . . . 176 
 
 XIII. A Picture Story 177 
 
 Supplementary Work 179 
 
 XIV. Writing a Story 180 
 
 XV. More Picture Stories 180 
 
 XVI. Writing Stories . . . . . . .182 
 
 XVII. A Fairy W T ish 182 
 
 Supplementary Work 182 
 
 Chapter Eight 184 
 
 I. A Study of Fables 184 
 
 Supplementary Work 189 
 
 II. The Study of the Fable, " The Wise Boar " . .189 
 
viii CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 III. Writing a Fable from Dictation . . 191 
 
 IV. Telling Original Fables 191 
 
 V. Writing an Original Fable 192 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . . 193 
 
 VI. The Wise Judge : A Story to be Read and Studied . 194 
 
 VII. Dramatizing "The Wise Judge" . . . . 195 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .196 
 
 VIII. Study of a Fable in Dialogue Form .... 196 
 
 Supplementary Work 197 
 
 IX. Writing a Story from a Dialogue .... 197 
 
 X. Picture Stories 198 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . . 199 
 
 XI. More Picture Stories 200 
 
 XII. A Poem to Read and Study 200 
 
 XIII. Copying the Poem, " Little Blue Pigeon " . . 201 
 
 XIV. Memorizing the Poem, " Little Blue Pigeon " . . 201 
 
 Chapter Nine 203 
 
 I. "What Frightened the Animals." — The Use of the 
 Exclamation Mark ; the Use of the Comma with 
 
 Noun of Direct Address 203 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 204 
 
 II. A Copying Exercise to Give Practice in the Use of 
 
 the Comma Learned in the Last Lesson . . 204 
 
 III. Studied Dictation to Give Further Practice in Uses of 
 
 Exclamation Mark and Comma . . . 204 
 
 IV. Unstudied Dictation to Test Use of Exclamation 
 
 Mark and Comma 206 
 
 Supplementary Work 208 
 
 V. The Months and their Abbreviations . . . 208 
 
 VI. Writing the Names of Holidays .... 208 
 
 VII. Writing Dates 209 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .210 
 
 VIII. My Birthday: Original Written Composition . . 210 
 IX. How the Months were Named : A Study and Writ- 
 ing Exercise 212 
 
 X. A Written Exercise on the Months . . . .213 
 
 XI. Study of Quotations about the Months . . . 213 
 
 XII. Memorizing Quotations 213 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 IX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 XIII. Picture Stories 214 
 
 XIV. More Picture Stories 215 
 
 Supplementary Work . . . . . .216 
 
 XV. Review of the Uses of Capitals and Punctuation 
 
 Mafks 216 
 
 XVI. Studied Dictation 216 
 
 XVII. Writing the Ending of a Story . . . .217 
 Supplementary Work 217 
 
 Chapter Ten 218 
 
 I. "For the King" 218 
 
 II. Studying the Story 219 
 
 III. Dramatizing the Story ...... 220 
 
 IV. Oral Reproduction of the Story . . . .221 
 V. Why Marks of Punctuation are Used . . .221 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 223 
 
 VI. A Fable to Study and Copy 224 
 
 VII. Writing a Fable from Dictation .... 224 
 
 VIII. Telling Original Fables 225 
 
 Supplementary Work 226 
 
 IX. Writing Original Fables 226 
 
 Supplementary Work 227 
 
 X. Contractions, Don't, Doesn't 227 
 
 XI. A Contraction that is always Wrong, Ain't . . 228 
 
 XII. The Exclamation Mark 229 
 
 XIII. Writing Exclamations ...... 230 
 
 XIV. Picture Stories 230 
 
 XV. "The Dumb Soldier" 231 
 
 XVI. "The Lost Doll" 234 
 
 XVII. Writing the Stories of the Dumb Soldier and the 
 
 Lost Doll 235 
 
 Supplementary Work ..'.... 235 
 
 XVIII. Writing True Stories -235 
 
 Chapter Eleven . . .237 
 
 I. Making a Story from an Outline .... 237 
 
 II. Writing a Story from an Outline .... 240 
 
 III. "The King's Dream" 243 
 
x CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 IV. Dramatizing the Story ...... 244 
 
 V. Oral Reproduction of the Story .... 244 
 
 Supplementary Work ...... 245 
 
 VI. Dates 246 
 
 VII. Writing Dates from Dictation .... 246 
 
 VIII. How to Write a Letter 247 
 
 IX. Letter Writing {Continued) ..... 249 
 X. Answering a Letter . . . . . .251 
 
 XI. Writing a Letter to a Friend 251 
 
 XII. Answering a PYiend's Letter 252 
 
 XIII. A Fable to Study 252 
 
 XIV. Writing a Fable from Dictation .... 253 
 XV. Making New Fables 253 
 
 XVI. Writing a Fable 255 
 
 Supplementary Work 256 
 
 XVII. "America" ........ 257 
 
 Supplementary Work 258 
 
 XVIII. Writing " America " from Memory . . . . 258 
 
 XIX. Picture Stories ....... 259 
 
 Supplementary Work 259 
 
 XX. More Picture Stories 259 
 
 Chapter Twelve 260 
 
 I. Suggestions for Using the Stories and Rhymes . 260 
 
 II. Poems for Additional Work 269 
 
 III. Books 272 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 A traveler crossing a plain in India saw at a 
 distance a slave who was busy drawing a bucket 
 from a well. The traveler approached the well, 
 hoping to get a drink. On reaching it he saw, to 
 his surprise, that the bucket came to the top of the 
 well empty. Again and again the slave let down 
 the bucket, and ever it came to the top empty. 
 
 " Hold ! " cried the traveler at length. " Do you 
 not see that the well is empty? In order to get 
 water from the well, you must either fill it from the 
 reservoirs on the hills or dig down till you reach 
 the natural springs in the earth." 
 
 This little story well symbolizes much that is 
 called language work — routine efforts to draw from 
 the shallow surface of the child's mind full meas- 
 ures of thought and feeling, efforts that we often 
 thoughtlessly allow to become ends in themselves. 
 Like the slave with his bucket, we go through the 
 motions ; we draw from our pupils words, sentences, 
 paragraphs, and punctuation marks, but they are 
 empty. And they will continue to be as empty as 
 the slave's bucket until we change our procedure. 
 
 But the story does more than symbolize our 
 futile efforts ; it suggests to us, as did the traveler 
 to the slave, what we must do if we would see our 
 efforts crowned with success. We must see to it 
 
2 INTRODUCTION 
 
 that the sources from which we attempt to draw are 
 well supplied; we must see to it that the child con- 
 tains — has command of — something expressible 
 before we attempt to draw anything forth. The 
 slave was told to supply his well either by drawing 
 from the reservoirs on the hills or by sinking the 
 well down to the natural springs. We must supply 
 the child freely from both sources. We must open 
 the ways for an unfailing supply of language ma- 
 terial from the "reservoirs on the hill," — the reser- 
 voirs of fable, fairy tale, legend, myth, story, poem, 
 — literature ; we must also tap the abundant and ever 
 renewed resources of the child's own experiences, 
 the springs deep down in the child's reactions to the 
 world about him — his ideas, his ambitions, his feel- 
 ings and emotions. We must see that from these 
 two inexhaustible sources the materials of thought 
 and feeling flow together and make up the abundant 
 stream of the child's mental life ; when we do this*, 
 we may draw deeply and without disappointment. 
 
 These books, this Manual and the pupils' book 
 accompanying it, — the Aldine First Language 
 Book, — have grown out of many years of experi- 
 ment in teaching "language," so called, — out of 
 experience in which the reservoirs of literature and 
 the springs of the children's lives have been tapped 
 successfully, have been made to flow together into 
 a rich mental child life and to flow out, on occa- 
 sion, into correct forms of expression bearing the 
 
INTRODUCTION - 3 
 
 precious stamp of the child-author's individuality. 
 The two books together furnish and suggest abun- 
 dant and varied material; they show just how this 
 material may be used most successfully ; they are 
 full of little plans and devices, every one of them as 
 interesting to the children as a game, but every one 
 purposeful and effective. 
 
 The literary materials which the books provide — 
 fables, myths, legends, stories of all kinds, rhymes, 
 and poems — the delight of childhood, answer three 
 tests. They are fully within the range of the child's 
 understanding and appreciation, within his interests, 
 his experiences, and imaginative powers; they are 
 of that type of literature of which some, at least, 
 must be known, assimilated, by every one who 
 would appreciate the best in adult literature ; they 
 are expressed in forms that may safely be followed 
 as models. Moreover, although classic, little of this 
 material has become hackneyed by general use in 
 Readers and other texts. 
 
 The variety of ways in which these materials are 
 presented arouses the keen interest of the children, 
 stimulates their thought, and quickens their whole 
 mental life. They discuss freely, they dramatize, 
 they reproduce orally and in writing, they work over 
 into new forms, they live and love the contents of 
 stories and poems. These become a precious and 
 an integral part of the children's inmost lives. 
 
 In the light of these childhood experiences of the 
 
4 INTRODUCTION 
 
 race, which are the basis of much of this literature 
 of childhood, the child becomes conscious and 
 appreciative of his own objective experiences — 
 experiences which arise from his association with 
 animate and inanimate nature — plants, animals, 
 playmates, mountains, valleys and streams, winds, 
 sun and moon. The child interprets, appreciates, 
 and assimilates the contents of literature only 
 through his own experiences, his own feelings and 
 emotions, that the literary contents recall and arouse. 
 On the other hand, and just as truly, literature re- 
 veals to the child his own experiences, makes him 
 conscious of them and their significance. 
 
 The method and spirit of freedom and individu- 
 ality which pervades all the work — or shall we call 
 it play, it is so spontaneous? — gives every child a 
 confident control of his own resources, his language 
 material. Expression in a language exercise be- 
 comes as natural, as abundant, and as individual as 
 on the playground. 
 
 With all this attention to content, what becomes 
 of form, the mechanics of language ? Are the uses 
 of the marks of punctuation, of capitals, of sentences, 
 paragraphs, and the rest neglected ? Not at all ; 
 the learning of correct language forms is emphasized, 
 but never as an end in itself, always as a means to 
 an end. In the study of the bits of literature which 
 the child understands and loves, he learns that cer- 
 tain forms are necessary to the expression of the 
 
INTRODUCTION 5 
 
 content; he learns to appreciate the significance of 
 forms, When he attempts to give expression to his 
 own language material — at first taking a bit of 
 literature as a model — he uses the conventional 
 language forms with discriminating intelligence. 
 Forms are taught only as the child needs them to 
 use ; but once taught, it is uniformly insisted that he 
 shall always use every language form correctly, and 
 that he shall know why he uses it. This conscious 
 and discriminating use of language forms from the 
 first soon grows into right habits. 
 
 Questions are used throughout the pupils' book, 
 for the most part, not to test the pupil's knowledge 
 but to arouse and direct his thought. This accounts 
 for the character of those questions, sometimes quite 
 frequent, that strongly suggest their answers. This 
 type of question is often necessary to insure the 
 trend of thought desired. 
 
 The division of the chapters into sections marked by 
 Roman numerals indicates relatively complete units 
 of work rather than lessons. Many of these units can 
 be completed in a single exercise ; some will require 
 two, three, or even more periods. The time required 
 to cover a section or a chapter will vary much, of 
 course, with different classes and different teachers. 
 
 Between the minimum amount of work that must 
 be done and the maximum that may be done in the 
 completion of the pupils' book there is a margin 
 wide enough to meet all the varying conditions of 
 
6 INTRODUCTION 
 
 time usually devoted to language and the varying 
 abilities of teachers, classes, and individual pupils. 
 Carefully timed experience shows that the average 
 class devoting two or three periods a week to lan- 
 guage can cover the minimum requirements — that 
 is, the regular, omitting all supplementary, work — 
 in two years, while the exceptional child, giving a 
 period a day to language, for the same length of 
 time, will hardly exhaust the possibilities both of 
 the regular and the supplementary work. With the 
 same number of language periods per week for the 
 two years, the first five chapters should be com- 
 pleted the first year ; the sixth chapter may also be 
 covered. In either case, the second year's work 
 should begin with Chapter Six. 
 
 The pupils' book is designed strictly for the pupils' 
 use ; it is addressed to the pupil, every line of it ; it 
 speaks to the pupil. It is a book for the pupil to 
 study and understand himself. This does not mean 
 that the teacher must give no aid. On the contrary, 
 the teacher should help the pupil to use his book, 
 teach him how to study, make him independent as 
 early and as fully as possible. The directions and 
 suggestions given to the pupils are made as simple 
 and as clear as possible. They must be taught to 
 read, to understand, and to carry them out. They 
 should be given whatever help they really need in 
 this, but no more. Learning to use their books is 
 an important part of their language work. 
 
TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 CHAPTER ONE 
 
 Before taking up the first lesson with the children, 
 the teacher should make herself entirely familiar 
 with the whole chapter, as given in the pupils' book 
 and in this Manual, that she may at the outset get 
 fully into the spirit of the work, appreciate the pur- 
 pose of the chapter as a whole and of every lesson, 
 and see the mutual relations of the lessons. The 
 following brief summary may be helpful. 
 
 The general purposes of the chapter, which con- 
 sists entirely of oral work, are to give the pupils 
 something interesting to think and to talk about ; 
 to get them to think their own thoughts freely and 
 to express their thoughts in their own language; 
 and to establish in the schoolroom informal, friendly, 
 cooperative relations between pupils and between 
 pupils and teacher. 
 
 In the carrying out of these general purposes, 
 definite and important beginnings are made in sev- 
 eral kinds of exercises which will be carried on and 
 developed throughout the book. Chief among them 
 are these: 
 
8 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 1. Expressive reading. 
 
 2. Learning how to study so as to get out the full 
 meaning of printed thoughts and feelings. 
 
 3. Practice in the vivid recall, the mental imaging of 
 events and actors about whom a story has been read ; con- 
 versing freely about them, using the language of the actors, 
 representing them. 
 
 4. Learning to dramatize, to turn a story into dramatic 
 form and to act it out. 
 
 6. Reproducing in the child's own words and manner 
 the essential ideas of a story that has been learned. 
 
 6. Making an appropriate ending to an unfinished story. 
 
 7. Telling original stories. 
 
 8. Reading stories in pictures. 
 
 9. Learning to describe. 
 
 10. Studying a poem : turning the ideas into story and 
 into dramatic form. 
 
 I (i). Reading* 
 
 Read with the pupils the fable, " Grand Task and Nimble." 
 
 This reading must be full of life and interest; 
 it must be marked with discriminating expression. 
 
 * Each section of each chapter of this Manual marked with a Roman 
 numeral refers to the section identically marked in the corresponding chapter 
 of the pupils' book, the Aldine First Language Book. The number in the 
 parenthesis following the Roman numeral in this Manual indicates the page 
 in the pupils' book on which the corresponding section may be found. The 
 titles given to corresponding sections in the Manual and in the pupils' book 
 are not always the same. 
 
 A section should be considered a unit rather than a lesson. No section 
 will require less than a lesson period; some may require several lesson 
 periods, depending upon circumstances. (See Introduction, p. 5.) 
 
TEACHING PUPILS TO STUDY 9 
 
 The actors and events of the story are rich in 
 contrasts. These contrasts, — the slow, colossal 
 bulk and pride of the elephant meeting the little, 
 alert, agile form and intense pride of the mon- 
 key, both of these presenting themselves before the 
 calm, dignified, wise owl, the joyful confidence of 
 the elephant and the terrified despair of the monkey 
 at the river, the helplessness of the elephant and the 
 efficiency of the monkey at the mango tree, — these 
 contrasts must be made to stand out, clear-cut. 
 This can be done through the voice, the bearing, the 
 expression of the countenance. The one aim now 
 is to read this story so well that every child will be 
 filled with its meaning, will feel with every actor in 
 it, will live through every incident. A single read- 
 ing will hardly accomplish this ; parts will need to 
 be reread again and again, by the teacher and by 
 different pupils, until the best, the most appropriate 
 rendering has been secured. No perfunctory reading 
 of one pupil after another, merely for the purpose of 
 giving all a fair part in the exercise, no rereading that 
 serves only to fill up the time allotted, will suffice. 
 
 II (3). Teaching Pupils to Study 
 1. Reread the fable, " Grand Tusk and Nimble." 
 
 A single, uninterrupted reading by the teacher, 
 by a pupil, or by five pupils, each reading one part, 
 should be so well done that every pupil will be tin- 
 gling with desire for expression. 
 
10 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 2. Teach the pupils to study the fable 
 
 Begin by asking them some of the easier questions 
 in their book, under Studying the Story, " Grand 
 Tusk and Nimble" such as : 
 
 Why was the elephant called Grand Tusk? 
 
 Why was the monkey called Nimble? 
 
 Where did the owl live? 
 
 How did the elephant and the monkey cross the river? 
 
 These questions should be asked by the teacher 
 and answered by the pupils with all books closed. 
 Questions and answers should spring from the vivid 
 vision of the story, with all its actors, scenes, and 
 events, as it fills the minds of teacher and children. 
 
 With their interest keen, have pupils open books 
 to the section, Studying the Story, " Grand Tusk 
 and Nimble" (p. 3). Show them in detail how to 
 study as their book directs. This is, quite probably, 
 the first lesson they have ever had in studying ; it is 
 of the utmost importance. Learning how to study, 
 and forming the habit of studying independently, 
 are fundamental to all sound advancement in lan- 
 guage or in any other subject. Help them patiently, 
 with individual discrimination, giving each one skill- 
 fully, by suggestion or by direct information, just the 
 aid he needs, and no more. Each succeeding lesson 
 of this kind should require less help from the teacher, 
 until the pupils become able to go about the study 
 of such lessons quite by themselves, intelligently and 
 effectively. 
 
CONVERSATION: QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS n 
 
 Have the children first read the directions about 
 answering the questions, sentence by sentence, and 
 make sure that they realize what every statement 
 means. Then have them read and answer the ques- 
 tions one by one, as though they were studying 
 from the book alone. See that they follow the 
 directions in doing this. A few of the easier ques- 
 tions may be left for them to answer to themselves 
 in the short study period that should immediately 
 follow this exercise. In this study period, each 
 child should answer to himself every question in 
 order, both those that have already been gone over 
 in this class study and those that were omitted. 
 See that the children understand the directions 
 about bringing a picture and thinking of questions 
 that they would like to ask. 
 
 Ill (6). Conversation : Questions and Answers 
 
 The immediate dominant purpose of this con- 
 versation exercise on the fable, Grand Tusk and 
 Nimble, is to prepare the pupils for the dramatization 
 and the reproduction of the story which are to fol- 
 low in succeeding lessons. To carry out this pur- 
 pose, the characters and places in the story must be 
 recalled and described vividly and clearly, the events 
 must be reproduced and seen distinctly in the order 
 of their occurrence. To effect this orderly recall 
 and clear description, the teacher's questions must 
 be systematic, progressive, and pointed. She must 
 
12 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 herself avoid and discourage in her pupils all irrele- 
 vant questions and remarks. The whole exercise 
 should give excellent training in orderly thinking 
 and clear expression. It will test the success of the 
 pupils' study period, and prepare them to study the 
 next similar exercise more successfully. 
 
 Substantially the following questions should be 
 asked, and asked in about the order given. These 
 questions include the questions that the pupils 
 studied in preparation for this exercise. Many 
 other questions may suggest themselves ; only such 
 as are consistent with the continuity of thought 
 should be asked. Do not forget to call for questions 
 from pupils. If they have no opportunity — if they 
 are not required — at this exercise to ask any of the 
 questions that they were directed to think of in their 
 study period, they will prepare none next time. 
 Suppress at once or hold in abeyance all questions 
 that tend to divert the thought from the orderly 
 essentials of the story. If this is skillfully done, the 
 questioner will not be discouraged, but he and all the 
 class will be given a lesson in discriminating between 
 the relevant and the irrelevant, — a power indispen- 
 sable to effective thinking. 
 
 The teacher should prepare herself so thoroughly 
 for this exercise that she will need no book. With 
 the story held vividly in mind, the questions will 
 come easily and in the right order. Of course, the 
 pupils are without open books. 
 
CONVERSATION: QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 13 
 
 People in the story. 
 
 Why was the elephant called Grank Tusk? Have you ever 
 seen an elephant? (Show pictures of elephants children have 
 brought, and ask the children to point out tusks. Have a picture 
 ready to show in case no child has remembered to bring one. 
 Keep for use in Section VIII all pictures of elephants that you can 
 collect.) Why was the monkey called Nimble? What does 
 nimble mean? Have you ever seen a monkey? Where? What 
 did he do that proved he was nimble? Where do monkeys and 
 elephants live when they are wild ? (The story does not tell this, 
 but a few words of description of an Indian forest or jungle will 
 make the story more real to the children.) Have you ever seen 
 an owl? Where? If not an owl, have you ever seen a picture of 
 one ? What kind of eyes did he have ? Did he look wise ? 
 
 Places in the story. 
 
 Where do you think the elephant and the monkey were when 
 they began to quarrel ? To whose house did they go? Where 
 did the owl live ? After leaving the owl's house, where did they 
 first stop ? What was their next stop after crossing the river ? 
 
 The talking in the story. 
 
 Who began the quarrel? What did he say? Say, "Behold 
 me ! See how big and strong I am !" just as you think Grand 
 Tusk said it. Say, " Behold me ! See how little and clever I 
 am ! " just as you think Nimble said it. When they asked the 
 owl which was better, to be big and strong or to be little and 
 clever, what did he tell them to do? Say these words just as 
 Nimble said them — that is, show how frightened he was : " Oh, 
 I never can cross that wide river. Let us go back ! " What did 
 Grank Tusk answer? What did Grand Tusk say when he found 
 he could gather no fruit? Give Nimble's answer just as you think 
 he spoke. When Grank Tusk and Nimble returned to the home 
 of Dark Sage, what questions did he ask them? What did each 
 answer? What wise words did Dark Sage speak? 
 
14 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Something to think about. 
 
 Do you think the owl knew just what would happen when he 
 sent Grand Tusk and Nimble for the mangoes, or do you think 
 he only wanted to get some fruit for himself? Was Dark Sage 
 a good name for the old owl ? 
 
 IV (9). Dramatizing the Fable, "Grand Tusk and 
 Nimble " 
 
 The initiative in dramatizing should always be 
 taken by the children. They will have to learn 
 how to plan and carry out a play ; but even in this, 
 which is possibly their first experience, they should 
 be allowed and encouraged to think out all they can 
 for themselves. Hence the questions and sugges- 
 tions addressed directly to the children. The 
 teacher must help them, in class exercise, to study 
 this section, Playing the Story, " Grand Tusk and 
 Nimble" taking up question by question, with their 
 books open before them, much as in the study of 
 Section II. Guide them as much as necessary, but 
 let the plan worked out for the dramatizing be really 
 the children's own. Where there is opportunity, as 
 in the assignment of parts, the location and width of 
 the river, the choice of something for a mango tree, 
 encourage a variety of suggestions, and then let the 
 children decide, so far as possible, on what is best. 
 
 The imagination should be depended upon to 
 furnish nearly all the setting. Almost any place in 
 the room will serve for the scene of the beginning 
 
DRAMATIZING 15 
 
 of the quarrel, a dark corner, or closet, for the owl's 
 home, a five or ten foot space between two cracks 
 in the floor for the river; and a chair or bench will 
 enable Nimble to climb the entirely imaginary mango 
 tree. An imaginary basket is quite sufficient for 
 the carrying of imaginary mangoes. 
 
 Have the play follow immediately upon the prepa- 
 ration for it. In the play, as well as in the prepara- 
 tion, encourage originality and initiative. There is 
 no value whatever in a mechanical dramatization in 
 which each actor remembers just what he is to do 
 and the exact words which he is to speak. Each 
 one must feel, live, be, the part he is taking ; then 
 he will act and speak spontaneously, naturally, and 
 fittingly. No two children, playing in this way, will 
 act and speak just alike in the same part. 
 
 To guard against mechanical uniformity — a stiff 
 and wooden production, — which is quite likely to 
 grow out of the teacher's desire to have the play go 
 off smoothly, this very first play should be repeated 
 several times, as convenient, but with different pupils 
 taking the parts. Each little actor should always be 
 encouraged to play his part as he conceives it, not 
 as some one played it before. This originality may 
 be encouraged by discussing the performances with 
 the children, comparing, commending excellencies, 
 and suggesting improvements. 
 
 In this first, as in subsequent plays, it will be best 
 to have some of the more capable children give the 
 
1 6 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 first production. In repetitions, less capable chil- 
 dren should have full opportunity. It is not wise, 
 however, to make up the whole cast of second or 
 third rate little players ; there should always be at 
 least one strong actor who will unconsciously set a 
 standard for the others. 
 
 It is always to be remembered that dramatizing 
 is not an end in itself. A finished, smooth produc- 
 tion, which has been achieved by endless repetition 
 and drill of the selected few, while the remainder of 
 the class have sat passively by, is to be condemned 
 from every point of view. The passive onlookers 
 get no benefit from it ; the participants get scarcely 
 more. Dramatizing must always be treated as a 
 means to an end. As a means, rightly used, it is 
 quite likely to be quite as efficient with those of 
 least as with those of most histrionic talent. 
 
 Make the atmosphere such as to dispel all timidity. 
 Make every child feel like throwing himself freely 
 into his part. This will aid, rather than hinder, 
 good "discipline." 
 
 V (9). Oral Reproduction of the Story, " Grand Tusk 
 and Nimble" 
 
 The oral reproduction of a story may be easy, or 
 it may be difficult ; it may have much or little edu- 
 cational value. The mere verbal reproduction of a 
 story, exactly or approximately as it was heard or 
 read, is easy for any one with a good verbal memory ; 
 
ORAL REPRODUCTION 17 
 
 but it is an exercise of little value. The reproduc- 
 tion of a story in the reproducer's own words, or in 
 words that he has made his own, after every thought 
 and act and event of the original has been assimi- 
 lated, is difficult and valuable. The children should 
 now be well prepared for this difficult and profitable 
 kind of reproduction. The expressive reading, the 
 study, and the dramatizing of the story, if these ex- 
 ercises were effective in themselves, must have con- 
 tributed strongly to this end. The teacher must see 
 to it that the cumulative effect of all these exercises 
 tells in every child's reproduction. 
 
 Be sure that the children understand the directions 
 given them in their book for the immediate prepara- 
 tion for the story, and that they have time to carry 
 them out. The story may be reproduced in five 
 parts, by as many children, one following the other 
 in quick succession, or entire by a single child. The 
 reproduction, entire or in part, should not be re- 
 peated by several children, just for the sake of test- 
 ing them on it, or of giving them an opportunity; 
 every repetition should be for a definite purpose 
 which every one understands, such as a more appro- 
 priate rendering of the conversation of one of the 
 actors, greater fluency, or the omission of unneces- 
 sary words. 
 
 To make this exercise as valuable as it should be, 
 the teacher must have prep'ared herself to reproduce 
 the story as the children are expected to reproduce 
 
1 8 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 it ; that is, not through verbal memory, but on the 
 basis of assimilation. She will then be more capa- 
 ble of appreciating the children's efforts and of 
 giving them helpful, constructive criticism. At the 
 opportune occasion, she should give her reproduc- 
 tion of the story, entire or in part, not as a form to 
 copy, but as an inspiration. 
 
 VI (10). Finishing a Story 
 
 This lesson in the pupils' book is presented as 
 though each pupil were expected to finish the in- 
 complete story for himself. This each one should 
 be shown how and helped to do. In subsequent 
 lessons of this kind, less and less help will be re- 
 quired, until finally the pupils will be able to com- 
 plete stories entirely by themselves — and stories in 
 which much more invention is necessary than in 
 this. As this is perhaps their initial attempt, the 
 exercise should first be studied with the pupils 
 something as follows. 
 
 First, read the story, as far as given, with the 
 pupils. Let it be so read that they get fully into 
 the spirit of it. Make sure that they recognize and 
 feel the similarity to the fable of Grand Tusk and 
 Nimble. Then finish the story under the guidance 
 of the questions and suggestions given in their 
 book. Give as little direct aid as will suffice. By 
 skillful questioning, selecting, rejecting, and com- 
 bining the contributions of one and another, what 
 
FINISHING A STORY 19 
 
 may be finally accepted as a satisfactory ending 
 may well contain only the thoughts of the children. 
 The ending, beyond that suggested in the pupils' 
 book, may be something like this : 
 
 George knew he could not run very fast, so he said to Tom, 
 "You go." 
 
 Never before had Tom run so fast as he did that day. Still, in 
 all his haste, he had time to think : " I was right. It is better to be 
 quick than to be strong." 
 
 He found the doctor at home, and they hurried back to the old 
 man's bedside. The doctor knew just what to give the sufferer, 
 who soon became better. 
 
 Then the doctor said to the old lady : " It is a good thing for 
 you, my friend, that George was strong enough to carry your hus- 
 band into the house and that Tom could run so fast to bring me 
 to your aid. Had it not been for these boys, I am afraid your 
 husband would have died." 
 
 The boys looked at each other and thought, " Sometimes it 
 is better to be strong, and sometimes it is better to be quick." 
 
 At the conclusion of this study and invention 
 together, one or two of the most capable of the 
 children may try to reproduce the complete story, 
 with the ending as worked out in class, or with their 
 own. After further study, for which time should be 
 given, each pupil should be prepared to reproduce 
 the story with the ending which he has thought out. 
 
 Encourage the pupils, in preparing themselves 
 for this next exercise, to think out, each one for 
 himself, the ending to the story, rather than to try 
 to recall the ending worked out in class. While 
 there is, obviously, no great opportunity for origi- 
 
20 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 nality, consistent with the general harmony of the 
 completed story, every child's ending of the story 
 should be individual in-some of its details, as evidence 
 that he has not simply memorized what others have 
 thought out. For the child who only so memorizes, 
 the exercise has fallen short of its purpose ; the child 
 has invented nothing for the completion of the story, 
 but merely reproduced the completed story, the 
 first part from the book, the last from the invention 
 of other children. 
 
 VII (12). Oral Reproduction and Completion of the 
 Uncompleted Story, "Strong and Quick" 
 
 Some children should tell the story from the 
 beginning; others need only give the ending sup- 
 plied by the pupils. To avoid monotonous uni-' 
 formity of these endings, insist that every child shall 
 make his ending vary from others in some notice- 
 able respect. Have the children who are listening 
 watch for this variation and comment upon it. It 
 may well be expected that some one's completion 
 of the story — perhaps modified by the suggestions 
 of others — will be more satisfactory than that 
 worked out together at the last exercise. 
 
 VIII (13). Telling Original Stories 
 
 The children should be able, and should be 
 allowed, to prepare their stories to tell without 
 direct help from the teacher. Encourage them to 
 
TELLING ORIGINAL STORIES 21 
 
 prepare original stories, or stories that they make 
 up from the suggestions given them. No child 
 should tell the story of the blind men and the ele- 
 phant except as a last resort. 
 
 The class exercise must not be spent merely in 
 the telling of the stories, as the children have pre- 
 pared them. Every story told should be com- 
 mented upon. The teacher should make her com- 
 ments, and the children should be encouraged, taught, 
 to make theirs. These comments, for the most part, 
 should be in the form of helpful, encouraging, discrim- 
 inating, appreciative, constructive criticism. It is 
 not enough to remark that a story is "good," or "in- 
 teresting," or "flat "; the definite things about it that 
 are good, that are interesting, should be pointed out ; 
 the reason for its flatness should be made clear. 
 
 In the teacher's criticism, particularly with begin- 
 ners, the pointing out and the approval of good 
 features should always predominate over the atten- 
 tion given to defects. This is a principle whose 
 application is by no means limited to story telling. 
 Children should also be taught to criticize in this 
 way. When this is done, criticism will cease to 
 suggest faultfinding and censure. 
 
 In this, and in similar exercises in story telling, 
 the teacher must keep ever in mind — and keep also 
 in her pupils' minds- — the main purpose in the tell- 
 ing of each story and in the critical comments made 
 upon it. That purpose is this : To help the teller 
 
22 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 and every other pupil to tell a better story, the next 
 time he tries, than he otherwise could. In other 
 words, every story told should be made to yield 
 some definite suggestion that will be helpful to 
 every one in the telling of stories. That every 
 story told may be made to serve this purpose fully, 
 the teacher must begin now, at the very outset, to 
 treat the matter in the way here suggested. Noth- 
 ing approaches nearer to mere time killing than an 
 exercise in which one pupil after another tells a 
 story, while all the other pupils sit passively by 
 except as here and there one may be occasionally 
 aroused by something striking or of unusual interest 
 in the story. Every child who is not telling the 
 story should be trained to listen attentively, — re- 
 gardless of the interest or dullness of the story, — to 
 think positively and discriminatingly, so that when 
 the story is ended he can make definite, critical 
 comments on the performance. To develop this 
 power and habit in children, the teacher's consistent 
 example alone will hardly be sufficient, but it is 
 indispensable ; it will do more than all else com- 
 bined to effect the desired result. 
 
 IX (14). Reading a Story in a Picture 
 
 (Picture of children at garden wall, p. 15) 
 
 To stimulate and at the same time to direct the 
 constructive imagination, to loose the individual 
 powers of invention, to encourage real and orderly 
 
READING A STORY IN A PICTURE 23 
 
 thought in every young pupil, nothing surpasses a 
 suitable picture rightly used. To use a picture 
 effectively for this purpose requires teaching skill 
 and insight of the highest order, especially in the 
 beginning. Here the teacher's task is that of teach- 
 ing children to read picture stories, not to describe 
 pictures. 
 
 A story picture contains a story just as truly as 
 a printed narrative does. But like the printed 
 page, the picture reveals its story only to those who 
 know how to read. Reading pictures is an art to 
 be taught and learned just as truly as reading 
 printed language is an art to be taught and learned. 
 Naming the objects in a picture, or telling what 
 one sees in it, or describing it, is not reading the 
 story that it tells any more than the naming at 
 random of the words in a written narrative or de- 
 scribing the way the narrative looks on the page, 
 is reading the story that the narrative contains, and 
 pupils must not be permitted, much less encouraged, 
 to talk about story pictures in this way. They 
 must be taught to read pictures. 
 
 How can this be done ? First of all, the teacher 
 must know, or learn, how to read pictures herself, 
 how to read them expressively and with a touch of 
 originality. If you are not accustomed to picture 
 reading, you will need to make most thoughtful and 
 careful preparation for these early lessons. In prep- 
 aration for the lesson with the garden wall picture, 
 
24 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 see how many distinct stories you can read from 
 that picture. 
 
 Obviously, your interpretation of the center of 
 interest in the picture will determine the heart, the 
 essentials of the story ; all else will be mere setting. 
 The center of interest in the garden wall picture is 
 just outside your range of vision. But the boy on 
 the wall sees it. What does he see ? What is he 
 pointing at? Is it a house on fire, a runaway 
 horse, an automobile smash-up, a big ship on the 
 sea, a brass band, a company of soldiers, a circus 
 parade, an explosion, a race of some kind, — foot, 
 horse, boat, automobile, — a father or mother re- 
 turning home after a long absence, a flying machine 
 just alighting or just arising from the ground, a 
 balloon landing, — or what is it ? Whatever you 
 decide it is, that will determine the story that you 
 will read from the picture. The setting, which in- 
 cludes the introduction and the conclusion, must be 
 consistent with the heart of the story and with what 
 the picture plainly shows. The whole story — in- 
 troduction, heart, and conclusion — should be brief 
 and pointed. 
 
 Think out in some detail several stories that you 
 might read from this picture. Tell or write out 
 one or two of them. If you start with the assumption 
 that the boy on the wall sees a circus parade, perhaps 
 you will read a story from the picture something 
 like the following : 
 
READING A STORY IN A PICTURE 25 
 
 The Circus Parade 
 
 One morning in June, Tom, Ned, Mary, and Baby were playing 
 in the garden. A ladder was leaning against the garden wall. 
 Tom climbed to the top. 
 
 At once he cried, " Oh, I see a big circus parade ! There is 
 an elephant and a camel and a clown and ever so many horses ! 
 Hurry, come up !" 
 
 Ned helped Baby and Mary to climb the ladder, and soon they 
 were all seated on the wall. 
 
 The circus parade came nearer. It marched right by the 
 garden. The children watched all the queer animals until they 
 had passed. 
 
 " What a grand parade ! " cried Tom. " Let us go in and ask 
 mother to take us to the circus this afternoon." 
 
 Neither this story nor any other of the many 
 possible stones which you have found the picture to 
 contain is to be imposed or intruded on the children 
 when you take up the study of the picture with 
 them to teach them to read it. Your ample prepara- 
 tion should fit you at once to follow the lead of the 
 children with confidence, and at the same time so to 
 direct their thought that an orderly and consistent 
 story will result. 
 
 Study with the children the questions in their 
 book. Hold them always to the point to be brought 
 out by any question or group of questions. , Help 
 the children to answer, skillfully suggest, and direct 
 the answers to these questions, as may be necessary, 
 but do not answer the questions for the children. 
 
26 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The exercise, to serve its purpose, must enlist the 
 mental activity of the children — their constructive 
 imagination, their powers of inference and reason- 
 ing; accepted by them in a state of passive recep- 
 tivity, the exercise is valueless. Of course the 
 degree of activity and originality will vary greatly 
 from child to child; but every child should show 
 some touch of independent imagination in response 
 to the questions concerning the center of interest in 
 the picture. Encourage great variety of replies to 
 these questions, but insist that they be in harmony 
 with what the picture plainly reveals. For example, 
 these are not satisfactory answers to the question 
 concerning what the boy on the wall sees : " a robin," 
 " a horse," " a boy," " a dog," " a house." Why not ? 
 Because such commonplace things would not excite 
 the children as they are obviously excited. Refuse 
 such answers and be sure that the children under- 
 stand why you refuse them. 
 
 By a little informal dramatizing, get the children 
 thoroughly aroused and into the spirit of the story 
 that must be told. If the boy on the wall is sup- 
 posed to see a balloon descending, let a child imi- 
 tate his look of excitement and gestures as he rushes 
 to a window, climbs up on a chair (ladder), looks 
 and points off, and let him cry out, " Oh, look, look, 
 the balloon, the balloon ! " Let the other children 
 answer, " Where ? Where ? Let me see," etc. 
 
 From the variety of answers that you get con- 
 
READING A STORY IN A PICTURE 27 
 
 cerning the center of interest, select one with the 
 approval of the children. With this as a center 
 construct out of the children's answers to other 
 questions a brief, harmonious story, taking care that 
 the children understand every step as fully as possi- 
 ble and that they be given the feeling of cooperat- 
 ing. Of course the resulting story will not express 
 any considerable amount of the originality of any 
 single child ; yet through the process of working 
 out stories together in this way each child will soon 
 learn how to read a story from a picture all alone 
 and to put into it his own conceptions throughout. 
 After the story has been worked out to comple- 
 tion, have one or more children reproduce it. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 1. Dramatizing the picture story. 
 
 Under your guidance encourage the children themselves to do 
 all they can in deciding upon the parts, the actors, the scenery, 
 etc., and in carrying out the dramatization. See the discussion of 
 the function and conduct of dramatizing (p. 14). 
 
 Supposing the story that you have to dramatize is substantially 
 that of The Circus Parade, these are some of the matters that the 
 children should be led to decide and carry out. 
 
 Children in the garden: How many? Who shall take part? 
 What shall they be doing at first? (Digging, hoeing, raking, 
 gathering flowers, playing tag.) 
 
 What shall serve as a wall and ladder? (Window sill with chair 
 beside it.) 
 
 Why does Tom climb the ladder? (Perhaps he heard a noise 
 over the wall that made the children stop what they were doing.) 
 
28 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 What does Tom say — exact words — as he runs to the ladder? 
 What does he call out as he reaches the top of the wall (window 
 sill) and looks and points off (out of the window) ? 
 
 What do the other children cry out as they reach the top of 
 the wall? ("Oh, see that big elephant!" "Hear the lion 
 roar ! " "Just look at those funny camels ! " etc.) 
 
 The dramatization might end, as the story ends, with a proposal 
 from Tom to see mother about going to the circus. (Children 
 all rush off to mother.) 
 
 2. Working out with the children other stories from the same 
 picture. 
 
 Take for the heart of these stories suggestions made by the 
 children in the first exercise. Let the stories be as different from 
 the first as possible. Expect the children to assist more in putting 
 these stories into form than they were able to do in the first 
 exercise. 
 
 3. "Original" stories told by the children. 
 
 From any of the unused suggestions that have been made 
 children may tell " original " stories. Only a few of the best 
 pupils should be called upon for these stories. Insist on point, 
 brevity, and consistency. 
 
 X (17). More Picture Stories 
 
 (Picture of children at window, p. 19) 
 
 As a result of the study of the last picture, chil- 
 dren should be able to make stories with a little 
 more independence. Still they must be well started 
 in the study of this picture. 
 
 While the stories that may be told from the 
 children at the window picture are very different 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 29 
 
 from those of the garden wall picture, their funda- 
 mental characteristics are the same, and they are 
 worked out in the same way. There must be 
 a center of interest in the story, something that 
 the children see, but that is not revealed in the 
 picture. It must be something quite amusing, as 
 shown by the children's faces. What is it? What 
 are children likely to see from a window that 
 amuses them ? 
 
 In taking up the study of this picture with the 
 children so as to get them started right, refer to the 
 garden wall picture and the way that the stories 
 were worked out of that after determining the 
 center of interest, and lead the children to see that 
 this picture is to be studied in the same way. Per- 
 haps the children will think that four of these chil- 
 dren resemble the children in the garden wall 
 picture. If they do, it may add to the interest to 
 let these stories be really a continuation of the 
 stories from that picture. 
 
 Get the children to give you a large variety of 
 things that would be appropriate for the center of 
 interest in a story which this picture would illus- 
 trate : as, a monkey with an organ grinder; a 
 dancing bear; a circus clown cutting up antics; an 
 exciting game played by other children ; a funny 
 upset with nobody hurt ; some harmless April Fool 
 trick. Encourage the children to enter heartily 
 into the spirit of the various suggestions, perhaps 
 
30 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 with the aid of bits of appropriate dramatization as 
 proposed in the study of the last picture. 
 
 With this aid at the beginning, the children may 
 be able to work out, each one for himself, under the 
 guidance of the questions and suggestions in their 
 book, appropriate stones. If they need more help 
 from you before attempting this, study further with 
 them, somewhat after this manner : 
 
 Outline of Stories from Children at Window Picture 
 
 Tom had a birthday party. He invited several of his little 
 friends. As they were playing (pupils suggest games), or as they 
 were eating (pupils suggest what), they were startled by (pupils 
 tell what). They rushed to the window and saw (what?). 
 
 Here have pupils supply the exact conversation of the children, 
 making it interesting, animated, and appropriate to the thing that 
 they are supposed to see. 
 
 Let the outside incident be ended. 
 
 What do the children say ? 
 
 Then they return to their game (how might they change their 
 game as suggested by what they have just seen?) or to their 
 lunch. 
 
 Give the children time to think out a story, each 
 one for himself. Encourage them to vary their 
 stories as much as possible from the one that you 
 may have worked out with them. There should 
 be enough unused suggestions regarding the center 
 of interest to enable every child to put a little of his 
 own thought, his inventive imagination, into the 
 construction of a story. 
 
LEARNING TO DESCRIBE 31 
 
 Do not mind that the results are crude, so long 
 as the children are thinking. The main purpose 
 of these exercises is to stimulate the pupils' im- 
 agination and to give them practice in expressing 
 the results of their imagining in orderly, connected, 
 pointed language. Stories in good form and full of 
 originality will come in due time. 
 
 XI (18). Learning to Describe 
 
 Read with the children The Blind Men and the 
 Elephant. Let them answer the questions follow- 
 ing. Then help them — as little as will suffice — 
 to read understand ingly and to carry out the direc- 
 tions under Something to Do. Be ready to provide, 
 if necessary, one or more pictures of an elephant. 
 Then call for several descriptions. Give the chil- 
 dren opportunity and insist that they judge and 
 comment on the descriptions, as suggested in their 
 book. This is just as important as the descriptions 
 themselves. 
 
 XII (21). Games of Description 
 
 The following " games of description " should in- 
 volve careful, discriminating observations, the accu- 
 rate oral use of language, and the interpretation of 
 this language in appropriate mental pictures and 
 ideas. See that the children, in their descriptions 
 and in their criticisms, follow the directions given 
 and practiced in the last lesson. 
 
32 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Game 1. The Four Blind Men. 
 
 The teacher blindfolds four children. Each in turn stands be- 
 fore the class and describes, from touch, an object which the 
 teacher places in his hands. The object should not be too 
 familiar — a piece of wood, a stone, a leaf, a feather, a nail, will 
 serve — and the pupil describing it must not name it. The pupils 
 at their seats criticize the descriptions and decide which is best. 
 
 Game 2. What Is It? 
 
 One child leaves the room. The teacher points out to the 
 other children some familiar, rather easily described object, as a 
 book, a pointer, a window. The child returns to the room, and 
 several children in turn describe the object that was designated 
 by the teacher. Of course they must not name it ; nor should 
 they, at first, give any peculiarity about it, such as its use, which 
 would make its recognition certain without real description. 
 
 In this game, the children are not blind men ; they can see be- 
 fore them the object that they are describing. After a few 
 descriptions, the child is asked to guess the object. If he does 
 so, he should tell whose description first enabled him to guess it. 
 The other children should pass judgment on the several descrip- 
 tions, as directed in the last lesson. The one that gave the best 
 description may be the next one to leave the room. 
 
 Game 3. Who Is It? 
 
 One child describes as clearly as possible another child in the 
 room. The pupil who first guesses which child is being described 
 may describe another. And so the game may proceed. 
 
 XIII (21). Getting the Story from a Poem 
 
 Read The Mountain and the Squirrel to the chil- 
 dren, trying to express its meaning as clearly as pos- 
 
GETTING THE STORY FROM A POEM 
 
 33 
 
 sible. Study it carefully and in detail with the 
 children, as suggested in their book. The recall and 
 comparison of the story of Grand Tusk and Nimble 
 will help much. The essentials, including the final 
 moral, are the same in both stories. 
 
 A further aid to the complete appreciation of the 
 poem will be a dramatization of it. Following the 
 suggestions for dramatizing Grand Tusk and Nimble 
 (p. 14), help the children to turn the poem into 
 dramatic form. Encourage free use of their imagina- 
 tion in the form of expression, but hold them to the 
 facts and meaning of the poem. Perhaps it will 
 work out something like this : 
 
 Mountain : Behold me ! See how big I am ! 
 
 Squirrel : Behold me ! See how little I am ! 
 
 M. : It is better to be big than to be little. 
 
 S. : No, it is just as well to be little. I am as good as you. 
 
 (Doubtless it was some such pert reply of the squirrel, making 
 himself equal to the great mountain, that brought forth the next 
 words of the mountain.) 
 
 M. : Little prig ! 
 
 S. : I know you are very big. But every one can't be as big 
 as you are. I am not ashamed to be my own little self. If I am 
 not so big as you, you are not so small as I, and you can't run 
 around and climb trees as I can. 
 
 M. : Run around ! Climb trees ! I am of more use than 
 that! 
 
 S. : Yes, you are good to run over. You are covered with my 
 tracks. 
 
 M. : I am covered with more than squirrel tracks. Just see 
 the great forests I carry on my back ! You cannot carry a single 
 tree ! 
 
34 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 S. : We were not all meant to do the same kind of work. It 
 is true I cannot carry forests on my back as you do, but — neither 
 can you crack a nut. 
 
 After the poem has been worked out in dramatic 
 form, let two children, adapted to the two parts, act 
 it. Encourage the use of their own language. 
 
 XIV (24). Telling the Story of the Poem, " The 
 Mountain and the Squirrel" 
 
 i. Read the poem to the children. 
 
 2. Have one or two children read it. 
 
 3. Have it dramatized — by children other than 
 those who took part at the last exercise. 
 
 4. In preparation for telling the story, question 
 the children somewhat as follows, requiring them to 
 answer with complete statements. 
 
 One day who had a quarrel? 
 Who began it? 
 What did the mountain say? 
 What did the squirrel say? 
 
 Let several children tell the story, each one in his 
 own way. If one uses the words and expressions of 
 the poem, well and good. If another follows rather 
 the dramatized form, accept that. If still another 
 uses original words or expressions, commend him, 
 so long as his story is true to the essentials. The 
 purpose is to get each child to enter fully into the 
 meaning and spirit of the story, and to tell it freely, 
 without self-consciousness, as an interesting incident. 
 
CHAPTER TWO 
 
 If the spirit and purpose of the varied exercises 
 of Chapter One have been realized, you are now on 
 intimate terms with your class as a whole ; more 
 than this, you are at least beginning to understand 
 sympathetically the interests, capacities, tempera- 
 ment, the possibilities of each child. Before taking 
 up the work of this chapter with the children, read 
 again the opening paragraphs of Chapter One 
 (pp. y-8) in which the content, the character, and 
 the purpose of that chapter are summarized and ex- 
 plained ; review carefully in your mind the way the 
 exercises of that chapter were carried out, and try 
 to determine to what extent the purposes of the 
 chapter have been realized. Then study this chap- 
 ter thoroughly, both in this Manual and in the pupils' 
 book, always using the two together, in order that 
 you may understand how this chapter continues the 
 exercises and aims of Chapter One, what advance- 
 ment is made, and especially the intimate, interde- 
 pendent relations of the various exercises. You will 
 find in all the wide variety of exercises offered — 
 which insures the constant, undulled interest of the 
 children — that not only has each exercise a definite 
 purpose, but that every purpose accomplished con- 
 
 35 
 
7,6 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 tributes materially to the accomplishment of every 
 other, and that all together advance the realization of 
 the larger purposes of language study — the enrich- 
 ment, control, and effective use of mental resources. 
 The contents of this chapter may be summarized 
 as follows : 
 
 1. A continuation of the work begun in Chapter One: 
 expressive reading; intimate study of simple stories; con- 
 versations; dramatizing; oral reproductions; picture study 
 and oral picture stories ; the study of a poem, and the render- 
 ing of it in dramatic and in story form. 
 
 2. New work. 
 
 (a) Sentences : statements and questions. 
 
 (b) The use of the capital to begin the first word of a 
 
 sentence. 
 
 (c) The use of the period at the end of a statement. 
 
 (d) The use of the question mark. 
 
 (e) Copying statements and questions. 
 
 (/) Writing from dictation: studied and unstudied 
 
 matter. 
 (g) Writing original statements. 
 (h) Relating original experiences. 
 
 I (25). Reading 
 
 Read with the children the myth, How the Linden 
 Came to Be. Let it be so read that every character 
 in it will stand out distinctly, — the strong, self- 
 satisfied oak, the frail, timid plant, the scornful 
 crow, the rough, unsympathetic wind, the kind sun 
 
STUDYING THE STORY OF THE LINDEN 37 
 
 and rain. Every reader must feel and appropriately 
 express the attitude of each of these characters. 
 With this purpose distinctly before teacher and 
 pupils, this story should be read and reread until 
 every child can at once throw himself sympatheti- 
 cally into the attitude of oak, plant, crow, wind, sun, 
 and rain. The child who can not do this has not 
 read the story; he has read only words, and the 
 lesson has not served its full purpose for that child. 
 
 II (27). Studying the Story of the Linden 
 
 This is a lesson for the children to study and pre- 
 pare by themselves. They should probably be 
 given considerable help about it; just how much 
 they need to make their study effective the teacher 
 must determine. (See suggestions for teaching 
 children to study a similar lesson, p. 9.) Probably 
 the greatest difficulty of many will be found in real- 
 izing just what every direction means. Read with 
 them these directions — also the directions in the 
 last chapter to which they are referred — and make 
 sure that they not merely understand what these 
 directions say, but that they are moved to do as 
 they say. To learn how to formulate and ask good 
 questions, as they are directed to do, is quite as im- 
 portant and just as difficult as the answering of 
 questions. Encourage them in this, and call for 
 their questions at the next lesson without fail. 
 
 The things to "do and say" serve not merely as 
 
38 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 a preparation for dramatizing the story; the prac- 
 tice of these things develops in the child discrimi- 
 nating feelings for the meaning and use of words 
 and expressions. Children should be encouraged to 
 abandon themselves to these exercises. In doing 
 so, they think, feel, act, live through and through. 
 Mechanical, perfunctory performance and speech 
 serve no good purpose whatever; they merely help 
 to develop and confirm the habit of making the 
 minimal use of language, — of getting the least 
 possible meaning out of language that is read or 
 heard, of putting the least possible meaning into 
 language that is used. 
 
 Children naturally abandon themselves sympa- 
 thetically to such exercises as these, when they feel 
 free to do so. You may find the recess period the 
 most suitable time for you to start the children — 
 and to join with them — in these exercises. They 
 will be found as interesting as any games. When 
 these exercises are taken up in the classroom, let it 
 be with all the wholesome freedom and spontaneity 
 of the recess period. 
 
 Ill (30). Conversation and Dramatizing 
 
 The children come to this exercise prepared — as 
 far as they can prepare — to dramatize the story of 
 the Linden. They have read it and reread it; they 
 have answered to themselves questions that bring 
 out the chief events of the story and the main char- 
 
CONVERSATION AND DRAMATIZING 39 
 
 acteristics of the actors; they have prepared other 
 questions which they wish to ask ; they have prac- 
 ticed doing and saying things as they were done and 
 said by the people in the story ; each one has thought 
 which parts he would like to play, and which children 
 he would like to have play the other parts. 
 
 What preparation shall the teacher have made, 
 and how shall she conduct this exercise — which is 
 to culminate in the dramatization of the story — 
 so as to enlist fully the thought and the activity of 
 the children ? She must have so mastered the sub- 
 ject matter of the story, have formulated so clearly 
 the plan of procedure, that she may be entirely un- 
 hampered by books, either the pupils' or her own. 
 The exercise may well consist of two parts: First, 
 questions and answers on the actors, actions, events, 
 and conversation of the story, and the choice of 
 children to take the various parts ; and, second, the 
 dramatizing. 
 
 The first part should be carried out in systematic, 
 progressive order, so that everything may stand out 
 clearly, with no confusion, in the pupils' minds. It 
 must be so carried out that the children will have, 
 and wall feel that they have, a large active part in 
 the matter. They must ask questions, they must 
 make suggestions about the children to take the 
 different parts, and about the way these parts are 
 to be acted. The teacher will direct and make ef- 
 fective the questions and suggestions of the children. 
 
40 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The following outline of questions and sugges- 
 tions, to be supplemented by such others as the 
 children may ask or offer, or as the teacher may 
 find necessary, will indicate more definitely the 
 course which the first, or preparatory, part of the 
 exercise should take. 
 
 People in the story. 
 
 Little Plant. 
 
 Where did the little plant live? 
 
 Choose a child to be the little plant. 
 
 At the beginning of the play should she stand or sit? 
 
 Where shall we have her seated? 
 
 Oak Tree. 
 
 What kind of tree was the oak ? 
 
 What kind of voice do you think he had ? 
 
 Choose a child to be the oak tree. 
 
 Did the oak tree grow near the little plant? 
 
 Then where should the child who plays the oak tree stand ? 
 
 Did any other trees grow near the oak tree and the little 
 
 plant ? 
 Choose five children for these other trees. 
 
 The Crow. 
 
 Show how the old crow came to the little plant. 
 
 Choose a child for the crow. 
 
 This child may hop to the little plant. 
 
 The child calls " Can't ! Can't ! " just as a crow calls 
 
 " Caw ! Caw ! " 
 The crow flew away from the little plant — you may show 
 
 how. 
 
CONVERSATION AND DRAMATIZING 41 
 
 The Wind. 
 
 How did the wind blow? 
 
 Choose a child for the wind. 
 
 Blow, " Oo-00-ooo," like the wind. 
 
 The little plant moved when the wind blew, — show how. 
 
 The Sun and the Rain. 
 
 How did the sun speak to the little plant? 
 
 Whom did he ask to help? 
 
 Choose children for the sun and the rain. 
 
 The sun and the rain gave the little plant a friendly hand to 
 
 help her grow, — show how. 
 Let the pupils playing the sun and the rain give the child 
 
 playing the little plant a hand, and lift her slowly to her 
 
 feet. 
 
 While the above questions occupy considerable 
 space, the points that they cover, and others that 
 will be suggested, can be brought out very rapidly 
 in an oral exercise for which teacher and pupils are 
 thoroughly prepared, and which is conducted with 
 spirit and animation. Dawdling, either of pupils 
 or teacher, will spoil the exercise and leave it un- 
 finished at the end of the language period. 
 
 All is now ready for the first dramatization of 
 the story. The children who have been chosen for 
 the several parts should be allowed to carry it out 
 as they conceive it. Encourage and commend 
 freedom and originality in action and conversation. 
 Each one should be true to the character of the 
 part he is playing ; he will be so the more easily if 
 
42 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 he makes no effort to remember the exact words 
 that were used in the story. 
 
 When the play is completed, discuss with the 
 children briefly the merits of it, encouraging each 
 one to form discriminating judgments concerning 
 its merits and defects. Make up quickly another 
 cast, with suggestions from the children, and have 
 it played again. The second group of players will, 
 of course, try to improve upon the performance of 
 the first. If there is time, a third and even a fourth 
 group may dramatize. 
 
 Reread the suggestions about dramatizing made' 
 in connection with the dramatizing of Grand Tusk 
 and Nimble (p. 14). The dramatizing of stories 
 need not be limited to the formal language period. 
 Nothing will better serve for a few moments of re- 
 laxation, when that is needed. By introducing 
 dramatizing in this way, every child may have fre- 
 quent opportunity to take part, and every story 
 dramatized is kept fresh in the children's minds. 
 Care must be taken to improve the performance by 
 repetition, to make it more spontaneous and natural, 
 to give it new touches of interest ; if this is not 
 done, it will become mechanical and perfunctory. 
 
 IV (30). Oral Reproduction of the Story of the Linden 
 
 First, have the story dramatized as effectively as 
 possible, that the actors and events may be brought 
 vividly and in order to the mind of each child. 
 
ORAL REPRODUCTION 43 
 
 The story should be reproduced from beginning 
 to end, if possible without interruption. One child 
 may reproduce it entire, or each part may be repro- 
 duced by a different child. Let the first reproduc- 
 tion be undertaken by a child, or children, who can 
 do it well. 
 
 Discuss the reproduction with the children, train- 
 ing them to discriminate the good and the weak 
 points. Perhaps it will be agreed after the first 
 reproduction that the events were related clearly 
 and in the right order, and that the several actors 
 were made to say what they should, but that the 
 distinctive characteristics of these actors, as the 
 weakness and earnestness of the little plant, the 
 strength of the oak, the scorn of the crow, the cold 
 roughness of the wind, and the warm sympathy of 
 the sun and the rain, were not adequately represented 
 by voice and manner. The next child to try the 
 reproduction must aim consciously to reproduce the 
 events and the ideas of the conversation just as well 
 as was done at first, and to bring out the character- 
 istics of the little plant, the oak tree, and the rest, 
 better. When he has finished, all the listening 
 children must be able to tell whether, and to what 
 extent, the child succeeded in his effort, and wherein 
 he failed. Perhaps he maintained the first satisfac- 
 tory reproduction of the events and the ideas of the 
 conversation, and brought out well the characteristics 
 of all the actors except those of the mocking crow 
 
44 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 and the rough wind. Let the next child try to 
 equal all the good points of this performance and to 
 represent more adequately the characters of the 
 crow and the wind. 
 
 So with every reproduction. The child who is 
 giving it must try consciously for a definite, superior 
 result; the listening children must judge the success 
 of this definite effort. Never allow a single repro- 
 duction in which the child is reproducing merely 
 because you have told him to reproduce. Never 
 call on a child to improve a reproduction already 
 given until it is perfectly clear to that child and to 
 all the children just wherein the improvement is to 
 be attempted. 
 
 V (31). Telling True Stories 
 
 As essential truth is necessary to the story of the 
 imagination, so imagination is necessary to the true 
 story ; both truth and imagination are indispensable 
 to all real stories. The truth of the one is generic, 
 of the other concrete ; both live in the imagination. 
 
 The study and appreciation of both types of 
 stories is necessary to the fullest enjoyment and use 
 of either. Rightly handled, there is not the slight- 
 est danger that this will lead to confusion of fact and 
 fancy in the child's mind. 
 
 Study with the children the suggestive questions 
 in their book and help them to weave their experi- 
 ences which these questions suggest into connected 
 
TELLING TRUE STORIES 45 
 
 narratives. These stories might work out some- 
 what as follows : 
 
 1. One day I had a package of radish seeds. I planted them 
 in my plot in the school garden. I helped the little seeds to grow 
 by making the ground soft. I pulled up all the weeds. I watered 
 the seeds. After a while my radishes were grown. I pulled them 
 and took them home. We had them for supper. 
 
 2. One day as I was coming to school I met a little girl about 
 three years old. She was crying. I asked her, " What is the 
 matter?" She said, "I can't find my mother." Then I knew 
 she was lost. So I took her home and then ran all the way to 
 school, for I did not want to be late. 
 
 The above are merely suggestions of the form and 
 simplicity of scores of stories that children are — or 
 may easily become — capable of telling ; they have 
 only to learn to command their own experiences, to 
 read the stories in their experiences, much as they are 
 learning to read the story in a picture. You must 
 help them, much as you help them to read pictures ; 
 you must help them to become conscious of their story 
 material. You must help each one to appreciate 
 and use his own story material — different from that 
 of any other; this will give a wealth of individuality 
 in the stories. 
 
 Numerous, varied, and suggestive questions will 
 help every child to recall something from his own 
 experience that may serve for the basis of a story. 
 For example, if the thought of the story is to be 
 helpfulness, ask questions such as the following: 
 
46 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Did you ever help a smaller child who had fallen ? had hurt 
 himself? had lost something ? was in the road in danger ? was 
 near the water? near the fire ? Did you ever help a child who 
 could not do some work that had been given him — at home or in 
 school ? 
 
 Did you ever tell or show any one how to find some place, as a 
 certain street, or the station, or the post office ? 
 
 Did you ever carry anything for an old person? help one 
 across a crowded street ? along a slippery walk ? up a steep hill ? 
 into a car or train? Did you ever give your seat in a car to some 
 one older or weaker than yourself ? 
 
 Did you ever shovel a path, weed a garden, run an errand, 
 bring in wood, care for baby, sweep a room, wash dishes ? 
 
 Such questions as these will not only help the 
 children to recall their experiences, they will suggest 
 experiences that they may make their own. To 
 reenforce this suggestion, tell them that in one week 
 you will have another exercise in telling true stories 
 of helpfulness. 
 
 Let all stories be short, clear, and pointed. When 
 conversation is involved, encourage the use of direct 
 quotation ; this makes the narration more vivid. 
 
 VI (32). Sentences, Capitals, Statements, and Periods 
 
 Study this lesson with the children. Do not do 
 for them what their book tells them to do, but help 
 them, when they need it, to understand just what 
 everything means in their book, and see that they 
 do as directed. 
 
 This first lesson in the use of forms, the capital to 
 
SENTENCES, CAPITALS, STATEMENTS, PERIODS 47 
 
 begin the first word of a sentence and the period 
 after a statement, is typical of the method employed 
 throughout in developing the habit of correct usage. 
 Note these steps in the process of developing the 
 habit of using a capital to begin the first word of a 
 sentence.* First, a clear grasp by the pupil, through 
 directed observation, of the fact that a capital letter 
 is used to begin the first word of sentences; second, 
 the statement to the pupil, and the understanding 
 by him, of the general rule that the first word of 
 every sentence must begin with a capital ; third, the 
 examination of sentences to find out with what kind 
 of letter the first word of each begins, and the 
 application of the rule to justify the use of capitals; 
 and fourth, the conscious application of the rule in 
 writing — at this time merely in copying — capitals 
 to begin the first words of sentences. Observe that 
 the steps in teaching to use the period after a state- 
 ment are exactly the same. 
 
 This one lesson has taught the child how to 
 begin every sentence and how to end every state- 
 ment. There is no exception to these rules, and 
 there is absolutely nothing more to teach on the 
 subject. The one thing still necessary — and this 
 is necessary — is that the child put into practice 
 
 * Any definition or characterization of a sentence at this time will confuse 
 rather than enlighten the pupil. Talk about sentences freely, refer to them 
 as sentences, and children will gradually and unconsciously learn the essential 
 characteristics of a sentence, something that no definition yet framed can 
 impart to them. 
 
48 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 what he has learned about the use of capitals and 
 the period. At first, and for a long time, this prac- 
 tice must be conscious. Every time that he begins 
 a sentence or ends a statement, the child must tell 
 himself, or some one else, why he is using the capital 
 and the period. If there be permitted no break — 
 and there must be none — in this consciously correct 
 use of the capital and the period, it will never again 
 be necessary to teach this matter to the children 
 who have learned this lesson. As the habit be- 
 comes fixed through many and frequent repetitions, 
 the explicit thought of the reason for these usages 
 will become unnecessary, and will fade away of its 
 own accord, subject to recall only when needed. 
 
 The conventional forms to be learned in order to 
 write correctly are but few. The correct use of most 
 of them is learned just as easily as that of the capital 
 at the beginning of a sentence and of the period 
 at the end of a statement. And all of them are best 
 learned in substantially the manner outlined above. 
 Little teaching and nt7ich practice is required. The 
 simple secret of progress is to hold fast to what has 
 once been learned by always using it correctly. 
 
 VII (35). Copying Sentences to Learn the Use of 
 Capitals and Period 
 
 This is the child's first written language lesson. 
 The teacher should read with the children the direc- 
 tion about telling themselves why they make every 
 
COPYING SENTENCES 
 
 49 
 
 capital and every period, and make sure that every 
 child understands and will carry out this direction. 
 The children may need reminding occasionally as the 
 copying proceeds. All these precautions will reduce 
 the number of mistakes, — which are better avoided 
 than corrected. 
 
 In this first written exercise, every child must use 
 correctly, must be made to use correctly, must know 
 that he is using correctly, the capital and the period 
 as he learned in the last lesson that these must be 
 used. Hence, every child's paper must be examined 
 by the teacher and corrected, if necessary, by the 
 child, at once. This examination and correction is 
 a part of the exercise. It were better to omit the 
 exercise altogether than to omit the correction of it, 
 — and to defer this is nearly as bad as to omit it. 
 
 The teacher should begin her examination as 
 soon as the pupils begin to write, passing by their 
 desks, and stopping for the immediate correction of 
 every error that she discovers. Corrections should 
 be made as follows : 
 
 If a child has begun a sentence with a small letter, the teacher 
 asks, " What kind of letter should you have used? Why?" 
 
 When this answer, which the teacher must exact, has been 
 made by the child, " A capital letter, because the first word of 
 every sentence should begin with a capital letter," the teacher 
 says, " Do it." 
 
 If a child has omitted the period at the end of a statement, 
 the teacher asks, " What should you have placed after this state- 
 ment? Why?" 
 
SO TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 She must insist on the answer, " A period, because there should 
 be a period after every statement." The correction by the child 
 then follows. 
 
 Do not let your questions calling attention to the 
 error, be merely a signal for the child to correct it. 
 It is quite as important that the child answer your 
 questions as it is that he make the correction. An- 
 swer and correction together insure that he does the 
 thing right and that he knows why he does it. Will 
 not the frequent repetition of these answers finally 
 make them perfunctory ? Of course ; so will the ac- 
 companying correct use of capitals and the period 
 finally become perfunctory. But this is only another 
 way of saying that the habit of using capitals and 
 the period under the conditions given is formed. 
 Errors in other things than the two for which this 
 exercise is given, as in spelling, should be called to 
 the attention of the pupil, and he should correct by 
 making his copy like the original. 
 
 VIII (35). Studied Dictation for Drill in Use of 
 Capitals and Period 
 
 Three minutes of real application should be quite 
 time enough for pupils to prepare the lesson to write 
 from dictation. See that each one applies himself 
 to it as he is directed to do in his book. 
 
 Have pupils close their books. Let one pupil — 
 not one of the best nor one of the poorest — go to a 
 blackboard in plain view of the class. With the undi- 
 
STUDIED DICTATION 51 
 
 vided attention of every one, dictate a complete sen- 
 tence, clearly, distinctly, and slowly. Have all pupils 
 in concert repeat the sentence, clearly, distinctly, and 
 slowly. Then let the one at the board write it. The 
 others watch closely to detect any mistake. 
 
 Let each sentence be corrected as soon as written. 
 Let the corrections be made just as directed in the 
 last lesson. Pupils at the seats, as called upon, 
 may indicate where there is an error, and the one 
 at the board may tell, if he can, what the correction 
 should be, and why ; then he may make it. Or 
 pupils at seats, as called upon, may tell what correc- 
 tions to make, and why ; then the one at the board, 
 or some other, as directed, may make the correc- 
 tions. Never fail to have given, by some one, the 
 reason for the correct form before it is made. 
 
 Proceed in this way with each sentence. If 
 there is time, erase the sentences from the board, 
 and have them written and corrected again in the 
 same way. This time let the dictation be taken 
 by one of the poorer pupils. 
 
 Never break a sentence in the dictation, reading 
 only two or three words at a time. The exercise 
 is not on the writing of words, but of sentences. 
 Given as directed above, it is not difficult for chil- 
 dren to grasp and to hold in mind the whole sen- 
 tence while they write it. Far fewer mistakes will 
 be made when dictation is taken by sentences, 
 rather than by words, or even by phrases. Do not 
 
52 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 be swerved from this plan just because some children 
 forget the sentence before they have completed it. 
 Let them do better with the next one. Much prac- 
 tice of this kind in grasping sentences as wholes has 
 a most important influence on the development of 
 the sentence sense, of the feeling for a completed 
 thought adequately expressed in a definite group of 
 related words. 
 
 IX (36). Unstudied Dictation to Test the Use of 
 Capitals and Period 
 
 The sentences below contain no word not used* 
 in 1, page 34, of the pupils' book. Hence, they 
 should be able to spell every word without study. 
 If you think it necessary, however, write on the 
 board the two or three that may give trouble, 
 let the children pronounce and spell them aloud, 
 then erase them. Now dictate, as directed in the 
 last lesson, these sentences. Let the children 
 write on paper ; it is a test exercise, in which each 
 one should show what he can do absolutely alone. 
 Let them understand clearly the two things for 
 which the exercise is especially given, the use of 
 the capital to begin every sentence and the use of 
 the period to end every statement. 
 
 The little plant was sad. 
 
 She tried to grow. 
 
 The oak tree tossed his branches. 
 
 He was proud. 
 
 He looked down on the little plant. 
 
QUESTIONS AND THE QUESTION MARK 53 
 
 Have the pupils correct their work at once, just as 
 directed in a previous exercise (p. 49). 
 
 X (36). Questions and the Question Mark 
 
 Study with the children their first lesson on 
 questions and the use of the question mark. 
 Merely help them to study out and to understand 
 the lesson for themselves. 
 
 Note that this is a type lesson, similar to the 
 lesson on the use of capitals and the period. As 
 that lesson taught everything that can be taught 
 about the use of a capital to begin a sentence and 
 a period to end a statement, so this lesson teaches 
 all that can be taught about the use of a capital to 
 begin, and a question mark to close a sentence that 
 asks a question. The study and the practice now 
 necessary to form the habit of correct usage in 
 this matter must follow the principles and plan 
 outlined in connection with Exercise VII (p. 48). 
 Study that lesson again most carefully. The ap- 
 plication of its teaching is fundamental to your 
 success as a language teacher. 
 
 XI (38). Copying Questions to Learn the Use of 
 Capitals and the Question Mark 
 
 Have pupils correct mistakes in this copying 
 exercise at once. Begin the examination of their 
 work as soon as they begin to write. Follow di- 
 rections already given (VII, p. 49). 
 
54 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 If a child has failed to place a question mark at 
 the end of a question, ask : " What kind of mark 
 should be used after this sentence ? Why 4 ? " Insist 
 on the answer : " A question mark, because a ques- 
 tion mark must be placed after every sentence that 
 asks a question." Then let the child make the 
 correction at once. 
 
 XII (39). Using Capitals and the Period 
 
 This is a lesson to be corrected as it is written, 
 and according to previous directions (VII, p. 49). 
 
 XIII (40). Picture Stories 
 
 (The toy shop picture, p. 41) 
 
 Make preparation for the study of this lesson with 
 the children, as directed in Chapter One (p. 22). The 
 number of distinct and interesting stories, that may 
 be worked out of this picture is almost unlimited. 
 The pupils' book and the supplementary work below 
 suggest several ; sketch in your mind the possibili- 
 ties of several more stories, so as to be prepared to 
 encourage every sign of originality that the children 
 may show. 
 
 Help the children to understand and study the 
 lesson as outlined for them in their book. The 
 center of interest in any story that may be worked 
 out is in the actions of the children before the win- 
 dow. Experience with the picture, however, shows 
 
PICTURE STORIES 55 
 
 that pupils direct their attention first to the toys; 
 hence the order of the questions in their book. 
 When they have somewhat satisfied their own in- 
 terest in the toys they are ready to consider the 
 picture children, their relation to the toys and to 
 each other. The children's own interests in the 
 toys to which they first give expression prepare them 
 to interpret sympathetically the interests of the 
 picture children. Encourage such interpretation in 
 working out the stones ; for instance, let the pupils 
 choose the presents they would select if they were 
 the poor children. 
 
 Help the children to finish the stories suggested 
 in their book, but let them do the thinking. This 
 is the opportunity for them to show their originality ; 
 do not deprive them of the opportunity. Your 
 function is to help them to express their conceptions 
 in an orderly and effective way. 
 
 When the lesson has thus been worked out, have 
 several children tell a complete story. Let each one 
 choose his own standpoint, that of the rich or the 
 poor children. Encourage originality in the 
 stories — even in those told from the same stand- 
 point. Do not let a child merely repeat from 
 memory the story that another child has told ; this 
 has slight value and is not in harmony with the 
 spirit and purpose of all this picture story work. 
 
 Without discouraging, try to prevent the children 
 rambling in their story-telling, bringing in many 
 
56 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 irrelevant details. Encourage concise, connected 
 thought and statement, point and climax; let every 
 statement advance the story a distinct point toward 
 the climax. All of this makes for brevity. 
 
 Have children choose good titles for their stories. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Have one of the poor children tell the story to 
 his mother on his return home. 
 
 2. Let one of the rich children tell the story to 
 his mother. 
 
 3. Let any one of the toys tell the story. 
 
 In order to tell consistently any of the stories 
 above suggested the pupil must become as com- 
 pletely as possible the poor child, the rich child, or 
 some particular toy, that he decides to represent. 
 This is not a difficult thing for children to do when 
 they understand clearly what is required and when 
 you insist that they maintain to the end the char- 
 acter once assumed. Do not permit a child to begin 
 a story in the character of a toy, for instance, and 
 then forget his role and finish the story as a child — 
 himself or one of the children of the picture. 
 
 Suppose the doll is to tell her story. It might 
 run something as follows : 
 
 The Doll's Story 
 
 I was born in a far-off land called Germany. I came across the 
 great ocean in a ship full of toys that were coming as Christmas 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 57 
 
 gifts for little boys and girls in America. I was taken from the 
 ship to a large shop and placed in the wide window with ever so 
 many other toys. But oh, how lonely I felt, for there was not 
 another German doll in sight. How I wished some dear little 
 girl would buy me and love me, O so much ! 
 
 The day before Christmas three poor children came and stood 
 before the window. 
 
 (It will be easy to finish the story, telling what the poor chil- 
 dren said, the coming of the rich children, who bought the doll, 
 who took it home, etc.) 
 
 After making sure that the children understand 
 what is required, perhaps by working out with them 
 the doll's story, let each child choose for himself the 
 story he will tell — that is, the child or the toy that 
 he will represent. Allow the children a few min- 
 utes, with their books open at the picture before 
 them, to think out their stories. Then have told 
 orally as many different stories by as many different 
 children as time permits. 
 
 See that the children choose appropriate titles for 
 their stories. 
 
 4. The story lends itself readily to dramatization. 
 In the simplest form, the shop window and toys may 
 be entirely imaginary, or sketches might be made 
 of them on the blackboard. To make it more real- 
 istic, pupils might bring a variety of toys from home 
 and arrange them in a " shop window." In addition 
 to the six children representing those shown in the 
 pictures, other children might take the parts of their 
 mothers. Thus the whole dramatization could be 
 
58 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 elaborated sufficiently for a Christmas entertain- 
 ment. 
 
 5. Tell the story of a toy that wanted to be chosen 
 but was not. 
 
 XIV (43). More Picture Stories 
 
 (Outside the garden picture, p. 45) 
 
 On account of the fundamental similarity in the 
 stories suggested by this picture and those of the 
 shop window picture, the children come to this 
 study somewhat prepared. They should here show 
 the results of their previous work. 
 
 Study with the children the lesson as presented in 
 their book. Do not forget that they, not you, are to 
 take the lead in thinking. Note that in the children's 
 book, following the fourth question, suggestions are 
 given for three distinct stories. Each of these sug- 
 gestions may be developed something like this: 
 
 1. Suppose the boy has no home. Obviously he must find a 
 home. Where? In this big house as an adopted son? With the 
 gardener as his helper? 
 
 2. Suppose the bofs father wants work. How can the little 
 girl help him to get work? If the boy's father should become 
 gardener, where will the little boy perhaps live? 
 
 3. Suppose the boy's mother is ill. What will the little girl do? 
 Will any one go to see the sick mother? What will be taken or 
 sent to her? When she is better what will be done for her? 
 What part will the boy play in all this? 
 
 These three are only a few of the many stories 
 that might be told. Before developing any one of 
 
TELLING TRUE STORIES 59 
 
 these beyond the mere suggestion, have the children 
 suggest as many other possible stories as they can. 
 Encourage each one to think out his own story. 
 Show them how to weave their thoughts together 
 into a straightforward, complete story. To do this 
 it will probably be necessary to work out with them, 
 perhaps to tell them, one whole story as a model of 
 form, — not of content. When they are ready, let 
 several children tell their stories. 
 
 Children should be taught to give an appropriate 
 title to every story they tell. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 1. Telling additional stories. 
 
 An exercise may well be devoted to the thinking out 
 by the children — with such help as they may need — 
 and the telling of several stories differing materially 
 from those suggested in the pupils' book, but involving, 
 of course, the boy and the girl as the chief characters. 
 Encourage each pupil to tell more than one story. 
 
 2. The story may be easily dramatized. 
 
 XV (44). Telling True Stories 
 Help children — as much as necessary, but no 
 more — to put their answers to the questions in their 
 book into good story form. If they are able only to 
 answer these questions disconnectedly, show them 
 how to join their thoughts, then let them reproduce 
 the resultant story. They will quickly learn to con- 
 nect their thoughts themselves. 
 
60 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XVI (46). Studying the Poem, "Spring Waking" 
 
 i. Read the poem to the children ; bring out the 
 meaning and the various and contrasted feelings as 
 fully as possible. 
 
 2. Help the children to study the poem, following 
 the questions in their book. 
 
 The poem is just full of delightful little scenes — 
 the snowdrop curled up fast asleep in the dark 
 ground with a blanket of white snow over all, the 
 bright sun shining warm and calling cheerily to the 
 snowdrop, the awakening, the popping of the little 
 snowdrop out of her bed in her white nightcap, and 
 all the rest. All these pictures the children must 
 see clearly in their imaginations — this is not diffi- 
 cult if the matter is rightly handled; they must also 
 feel with the sun and with the snowdrop, as the con- 
 versation between the two and the brief descriptions 
 suggest. The questions in the pupils' book and the 
 reading of certain lines are designed to help the 
 children to see the scenes in imagination, and to feel 
 with the sun and the snowdrop. Have them read 
 and reread the lines suggested until you are sure 
 from their emphasis and expression that they 
 are expressing the feelings, the thoughts, the mental 
 pictures that they are actually experiencing. This 
 is reading; this is appreciating literature. 
 
 If any child has never seen a snowdrop, show one 
 if you can. The next best thing is a picture or a 
 
PART READING AND DRAMATIZING 61 
 
 drawing on the blackboard, with such description as 
 will enable the child to form an approximately correct 
 mental picture. 
 
 Your skill as a teacher is shown in your insight 
 and resourcefulness in aiding the children to utilize 
 such experiences as they have had in their efforts to 
 appreciate thought and feeling represented by printed 
 words. For instance, it may help the children to a 
 sympathetic appreciation of the snowdrop's part if 
 you make reference to their feelings at the call to 
 get up early on a cold morning. When they have 
 finally made up their minds to arise, do they do it 
 slowly, or do they "pop " out of bed just as the snow- 
 drop did ? After they are up and dressed and out 
 in the cheerful sunlight, do they want to go back to 
 bed again, or are they glad, as the snowdrop was ? 
 
 The general lesson of the poem is quite similar 
 to that of the myth, The Little Plant and the Oak 
 Tree, the first story in this chapter. It will be a 
 good test of the children's understanding of both the 
 myth and the poem to see whether they will note 
 the similarity. Perhaps a few questions, helping 
 them to recall and to compare the myth with the 
 poem, will be necessary. 
 
 XVII (50). Part Reading and Dramatizing a Poem 
 
 Let the teacher read the narrative parts of Spring 
 Waking while two children take the parts of the 
 sun and the snowdrop, like this: 
 
62 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 First Stanza. 
 
 Teacher : A snowdrop lay in the sweet dark ground, 
 
 Sun : Come out, come out ! 
 
 Teacher : But she lay quite still and she heard no sound ; 
 
 Sun : Asleep, no doubt ! 
 
 Second Stanza. 
 
 Teacher : The snowdrop heard, for she raised her head, 
 
 Sun : Look spry, look spry ! 
 
 Snowdrop : It's warm here in bed. 
 
 Sun : Oh, fie ! Oh, fie ! 
 
 Such part reading is excellent preparation for 
 dramatizing, which should follow the reading. The 
 snowdrop may be covered with a white apron (the 
 snow). The conversation between the sun and the 
 snowdrop should follow the order and the ideas of 
 the poem, but not necessarily the exact words. A 
 third child might be introduced to represent the 
 robin, who speaks or sings something like this : 
 " Cheer-up, cheer-up ! Snowdrop is awake ! The 
 air is growing warm ! Cheer-up, cheer-up ! " 
 
 XVIII (50). Learning to Tell a Story 
 
 Help pupils to work out an interesting, connected 
 story from the poem, Spring Waking, following the 
 suggestions given in the pupils' book. This is no 
 trivial requirement of the pupil at this stage of his 
 progress. He must get the thought from the poem 
 in connected, progressive order, and then express it 
 clearly and connectedly in his own language. It 
 
ORAL REPRODUCTIONS 63 
 
 will not do to make a dry, condensed statement of 
 the main ideas of the story, as, " The snowdrop was 
 asleep under the snow, the sun called her, and she 
 got up." On the contrary, the story should contain 
 rather more detail than the poem gives ; especially 
 may the conversation be elaborated to advantage. 
 The expression should be appropriate ; a colorless 
 statement of facts does not make a story. The con- 
 versational parts call for animation and inflection; 
 even something of dramatic action will aid. 
 
 In helping the children to work out the story, they 
 may well take turns, one telling a portion, that one 
 followed by another telling the next portion, and so 
 on. Each child's contribution should be encour- 
 agingly criticized and suggestions for improvement 
 made when necessary ; then the child should try 
 again until he has made his part satisfactory. This 
 will help the children to form the habit of judging 
 their own efforts critically. 
 
 XIX (51). Oral Reproductions 
 
 Have pupils tell the complete story of the sun 
 and the snowdrop. This must not be mere perfunc- 
 tory repetition. Each pupil should do his best ; then 
 his production should be definitely criticized by pupils 
 and teacher, in a kindly way of course, and always 
 with suggestions for improvement. Then each one 
 following should try to retain all the good points of 
 previous ones and to make improvements. 
 
CHAPTER THREE 
 
 Before taking up this chapter with the children, 
 master its content and purposes yourself. Study it 
 thoroughly both in the children's book and in this 
 Manual so that you may understand clearly what 
 you are to do and what the children are to do — 
 alone, and under your guidance. Compare carefully 
 the exercises of this chapter in content, form, and 
 purpose with the work already done in previous 
 chapters. Read again the introductory paragraphs 
 of Chapters One and Two (pp. y-8, 35-36) ; they 
 apply equally here. 
 
 Several things that you should observe in this 
 preparatory and comparative study: 
 
 1. In the continuation of the several different types of 
 work already begun — reading, dramatizing, oral story 
 telling, and the rest — there is gradual and constant advance 
 in the opportunities and demands made upon the children 
 for original, independent thought and effort. For examples, 
 they must learn to take the initiative more and more in the 
 preparation and execution of a dramatization; to study more 
 independently; to use more originality in conception and 
 expression. 
 
 2. Copying and dictation are used always with definite 
 purpose — usually to teach, fix, and test pupils' mastery of 
 the use of various language forms. 
 
 64 
 
READING THE STORY 65 
 
 3. The new work presented in this chapter : 
 
 (a) Titles — studied, copied, and written from dicta- 
 
 tion; making and writing original titles. 
 
 (b) The first lesson in written reproduction of a story. 
 
 (c) Copying, memorizing, and writing poetry from 
 
 memory. 
 
 I (52). Reading the Story, " Mabel and the Fairy Polk " 
 
 Let the teacher read this story to the children, 
 and read it so well that every one will be inspired 
 to read up to the teacher's standard, when he has 
 the opportunity. Even teachers cannot do their 
 best without practice and rehearsal. 
 
 Now have the story read in dialogue form by the 
 children. Thus, in the first part, " Mabel and the 
 Fairy Queen," have one child take the part of 
 Grandmother, another the part of Mabel, and a third 
 that of the Fairy Queen, each one reading only 
 what is said by the one he represents. All short 
 explanatory parts that are not generally necessary 
 to the understanding of the conversation, such as, 
 " said Grandmother one morning," should be omitted. 
 Longer descriptive or narrative parts, like the fourth, 
 sixth, eighth, the end of the ninth, and the tenth 
 paragraphs of the first part, should be read by a 
 child designated for this, or better, in this first 
 exercise of the kind, by the teacher. 
 
 For the second part, " Mabel and the Brownies," 
 five children are necessary to take the parts of 
 
66 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Grandmother, Mabel, and three Brownies. For the 
 last part, " Mabel and the Elves," Rve children are 
 also necessary for Grandmother, Mabel, and three 
 elves. 
 
 To take any of these parts well, the one taking it 
 must have some rather clear conception of the 
 character of the person he is trying to represent. 
 Without that conception, it is manifestly impossible 
 to speak intelligently as that person did. What 
 kind of person was Grandmother ? Mabel ? the 
 Fairy Queen ? What kind of people were the 
 brownies? the elves? Discuss these matters briefly 
 with the children before their reading begins. It is 
 not necessary that there be agreement ; it is impor- 
 tant that each one have some conception of the 
 character of the persons who speak in the story, and 
 whose conversation is now to be taken by the 
 children. 
 
 Discuss with the children the rendering of the 
 several parts, to bring out clearly — in a way that 
 every child can understand — the good features of 
 each one and those features needing improvement. 
 With every child knowing just what improvements 
 in each part are to be made, have the story reread 
 — a section at a time — by children who have not 
 previously taken part. Let the listening children 
 determine whether each desired improvement has 
 been made. Do not leave the story, or any part of 
 it, until the improvement determined upon has been 
 
DRAMATIZING . 67 
 
 made, until the children recognize that it has been 
 made, even if you have to make this improvement 
 yourself. 
 
 II (55). Dramatizing "Mabel and the Fairy Folk" 
 
 Have the story read once again, in dialogue form 
 as before'. Let the principal parts be taken by chil- 
 dren who took minor or no parts at the previous 
 readings. Let the reading be the very best of which 
 the children are capable. 
 
 This, with the previous readings, should be suffi- 
 cient preparation for the dramatizing. The pupils 
 must be made, from the beginning, to feel large 
 responsibility for a successful dramatization ; and 
 yet, on no account must they be allowed to fail. 
 This means that the teacher must have clearly in 
 mind, at the outset, just how the dramatization may 
 be arranged and carried out in its every detail. It 
 means equally that the teacher must hold her concep- 
 tions severely in reserve. The teacher's concep- 
 tions are for her own use, not for the direct use of 
 the pupils ; they are to enable the teacher at every 
 point, and without hesitation, to ask the question, to 
 give the hint or the suggestion, that will enable the 
 pupils to make and to carry out their own plans for 
 the dramatization. 
 
 So give to your pupils — and do this with con- 
 fidence — the initiative in assigning the parts, in 
 locating the different scenes, and in suggesting the 
 
68 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 scenery — spring, pitcher, trees, flowers — which may 
 all be imaginary. Recall the directions and sug- 
 gestions given for dramatizing in previous lessons. 
 (See pp. 14, 38.) 
 
 Ill (55). Oral Questions 
 
 Allow the pupils not more than eight or ten 
 minutes to prepare this exercise ; even five minutes 
 of application is vastly better for them, and will give 
 better results, than will a half-hour of dawdling. 
 See to it that they are concentrating their attention 
 every instant on the work before them. Remember 
 that they are just beginning to learn how to study; 
 it is a critical time. If you take this study period 
 as a convenient time for you to do something not 
 connected with the pupils' study, if you forget them 
 for fifteen minutes, then find, on inquiry, that none 
 of them has " had time " to get through with all the 
 questions, if you then allow them a "few minutes 
 more," — while you continue with your own affairs, 
 — and if, finally, when you take up the recitation, 
 you find wandering attention, little interest, and less 
 knowledge, do not be in the least surprised. That 
 is just what you should expect with that kind of 
 preparation. And if you permit such study periods 
 regularly, frequently, or even occasionally, and if later 
 you hear grammar teachers, high school teachers, 
 and college professors complain that their pupils 
 have never learned to study, to concentrate their 
 
ORAL QUESTIONS 69 
 
 minds on the task before them, do not be surprised. 
 You might have foretold this result, because in 
 those pupils' first study lessons you did all that 
 could be done then to bring it to pass. 
 
 The pupils' study period — particularly when pu- 
 pils are just learning how to study — demands the 
 undivided and concentrated attention of the teacher. 
 The pervading influence of this example, were there 
 really nothing for the teacher to do, would be abun- 
 dant warrant for it. But the teacher thus con- 
 centrating her attention on her studying pupils will 
 be fully occupied; this pupil will need a hint or a 
 suggestion, that one a question, another a bit of 
 encouragement, still another perhaps a sharp recall 
 to his task, and so on. The teacher must realize 
 that the habit of concentration — or of dissipation — 
 which the pupils are now forming, is of infinitely 
 more importance than is the learning of the lesson 
 before them. 
 
 At the end of this brief but concentrated study 
 period — it is not at all necessary to wait for every 
 pupil to have answered to himself every question — 
 have all books closed, your own as well as the 
 pupils'. Ask questions to bring out systematically 
 and progressively the main ideas of the story ; see 
 that your questions include most of those that the 
 pupils have been studying in their book. Do not 
 fail to have the pupils ask at least the questions 
 they were directed in their book to prepare ; en- 
 
70 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 courage them to ask others. Do not, however, 
 permit questions or comments that are irrelevant. 
 Train to concentration of thought, and give a con- 
 stant example of it ; this is just as important in the 
 recitation as in the study period. 
 
 Supplementary Work* 
 
 The story, Mabel and the Fairy Folk, may be re- 
 produced orally. The reading, the dramatizing, and 
 the study should have prepared pupils to do this 
 well. Recall the directions and suggestions about 
 oral reproduction already given (pp. 16, 42). Sup- 
 plementary work, if undertaken at all, must, of 
 course, be just as well done as though it were 
 regular work. 
 
 IV (57). Writing Questions 
 
 Give your undivided attention to the pupils while 
 they write the questions as directed in their book. 
 First, see that every one understands what his book 
 tells him to do ; then see that he does it as quickly 
 and as well as possible. Let the quicker pupils 
 keep busy, by writing more than three questions. 
 Do not give more than eight or ten minutes to this 
 part of the lesson, even though not all pupils com- 
 plete three questions. 
 
 * From this point on, supplementary work will be suggested frequently. 
 This work is what the designation of it indicates ; none of the regular work 
 depends upon it. It is offered for teachers to use in their discretion, when- 
 ever time permits, or the needs of their class make it desirable. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 71 
 
 Impress upon the children the necessity of asking 
 good, sensible questions. Give individual sugges- 
 tion and help to those who need it. 
 
 Now have papers exchanged, questions read, and 
 answered orally, as follows : A child reads a ques- 
 tion. If it is correctly written, he answers it in a 
 sentence ; if anything is wrong about it, he says, " I 
 shall not answer this question, because " (giv- 
 ing the reason, as, " it does not begin with a capital 
 letter "). Other questions are read and answered, or 
 rejected, in the same way. The teacher should be 
 in a position to see what mistakes, if any, the pupil 
 reading makes. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 1. Have papers read and answered that, for lack 
 of time, may not have been taken up at the regular 
 exercise. 
 
 2. Have questions corrected by pupils who wrote 
 them, giving reasons for their corrections, as directed 
 in Chapter Two (VII, p. 48). 
 
 3. Distribute the pupils' papers, which have 
 been preserved for the purpose. Let pupils write 
 answers to the questions, making a complete sentence 
 for each answer. They should be reminded of the 
 correct beginning and ending of statements. If this 
 exercise is given, it must be carried out and cor- 
 rected just as carefully, and in the same way, as a 
 regular exercise. 
 
72 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 V (58). How Titles are Written 
 
 Study this lesson with the pupils, making sure 
 that they understand it, but giving only such direct 
 help as may be necessary. This lesson contains 
 the model for the study of titles. 
 
 VI (59). Copying a Story 
 
 The purpose of this lesson is to give the pupil 
 drill in writing a title properly and to review the 
 use of capitals to begin sentences, the period to end 
 statements, and the question mark to end questions.. 
 On the blackboard, or on a sheet of paper held up 
 before the class, show pupils: (1) where to place 
 the title (in the middle of the page), (2) the space 
 to leave between the title and the first line, and 
 (3) the indention of the first line. About the in- 
 dention of the first line, it will be sufficient at this 
 time to tell and show them that there should be left 
 a space of about one inch between the edge of the 
 paper and the beginning of the first line, while that 
 between the edge and other lines should be only 
 half as much. The subject of margins will be 
 taken up later. 
 
 As the pupils copy, the teacher should be moving 
 about among them, helping them, by a hint or a 
 question, to avoid errors and to make corrections 
 when necessary. The corrections are to be made 
 as previously directed (p. 49). 
 
DICTATION 73 
 
 VII (60). Dictation: "The Trees and the Woodcutter" 
 
 The purpose of this exercise is to test and to 
 apply the pupils' knowledge of the writing of a title 
 and the correct use of capitals, period, and question 
 mark. Dictate the story already studied and copied, 
 The Trees and the Woodcutter. Let the exercise 
 proceed like this : 
 
 Teacher : This is the title, The Trees and the Woodcutter. 
 Pupils repeat the title, The Trees and the Woodcutter, slowly 
 and distinctly in concert. Then all write. 
 
 Teacher : This is the first sentence, A woodcutter, etc. 
 Pupils repeat the sentence in concert, then write it. 
 
 Teacher : This is the next (or second) sentence, The trees, etc. 
 Pupils repeat and write. 
 
 The other sentences are dictated, repeated, and 
 written in the same manner. It is worthy of note 
 that whenever speaking of a sentence, the teacher 
 uses the word "sentence." 
 
 Pupils must be trained to concentrated attention 
 in taking dictation. As a rule, the teacher should 
 give a sentence only once ; pupils should repeat 
 only once. Sentences must be given as wholes, 
 never broken up into words. If your pupils are 
 not yet capable of taking this dictation in this way, 
 simplify and shorten it. Two short sentences can 
 easily be made of the first rather long one ; the rest 
 may be abbreviated and changed. Thus simplified, 
 it might read as follows : 
 
74 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 A woodcutter went into the forest. He asked the trees to give 
 him a handle for his ax. The trees gave him a young ash tree. 
 He made a handle of it. Then what do you think happened? 
 The woodcutter began to cut down the trees. Soon all the tall 
 trees were laid low. Were they not well punished for giving up 
 their little brother? 
 
 Read again carefully the suggestions about dicta- 
 tion (p. 50). 
 
 Let the exercise be corrected at once, as directed 
 in Chapter Two (p. 51). 
 
 This correction should take but a few minutes, if 
 the teacher is accustomed to see quickly and to work 
 rapidly. Pay especial attention to the correction of 
 any mistakes in the title, as this is the new subject: 
 which is being taught. If a child has omitted a 
 capital, insist that he give an exact and full state- 
 ment of the reason for using it, thus, " The should 
 have been begun with a capital because it is the first 
 word of a title," or, " I should have begun trees with 
 a capital because it is an important word of a title." 
 
 VIII (60). Copying Titles 
 
 The corrections of errors by the pupils should 
 begin as soon as the first title is copied. The teacher 
 passes about among the children as they work, and 
 calls their attention to errors, as directed in Chapter 
 Two (p. 49, VII). The reason for the correction 
 must always be insisted upon before the correction 
 is made by the pupil. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 75 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 Write lists of titles upon the board for pupils to 
 study and to recite upon. These may also be 
 copied, and the work corrected. 
 
 IX (61). Writing Titles from Dictation 
 
 Dictate the titles copied in Section VIII, p. 60. 
 Have work corrected at once. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Without study by the pupils, dictate several easy 
 titles taken from stories in the reading book. Diffi- 
 cult words should be spelled orally before pupils 
 write them. One pupil may write at the board, 
 while others look out for errors, or all may write at 
 their seats. In either case, errors should be cor- 
 rected, and reasons given for every correction, just 
 as conscientiously as though this were regular 
 instead of supplementary work. Better omit the 
 supplementary work altogether than to let it be 
 done shiftlessly. 
 
 Some pupil may call attention to the fact that in 
 some printed titles capital letters are used through- 
 out. If this should happen, it would be well to 
 have pupils examine titles in several of their books. 
 They will probably discover that in some books the 
 first letter of some words of the title is larger than 
 the other letters, though all are capitals. When 
 such is the case, let them discover, if they can, that 
 
76 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the words beginning with the large capitals are the 
 first and important words of the title. 
 
 It may be easily explained that the rules given in 
 the pupils' book concern written not printed titles. 
 
 X (61). Giving Titles to Pictures 
 
 Prepare pupils to make good titles by studying 
 with them possible titles of pictures in Chapters One 
 and Two. Get the children to give as many titles 
 as possible that they think suitable for these pictures. 
 Write all titles given on the blackboard. Criticize 
 each, rejecting the poor ones and retaining the good 
 ones. For example, such titles as the following may 
 be suggested for the garden wall picture : 
 
 The Boy Pointing. (Poor, because it does not recall the pic- 
 ture as a whole, nor does it suggest any story that can be easily 
 read from the picture.) 
 
 The Ladder. (Poor, for reasons just given.) 
 The Garden Wall. (Rather poor ; suggests little.) 
 The Children Who Climbed to the Top of the Garden 
 Wall. (Better than the preceding, but too long.) 
 
 " O Look ! " (Good ; it arouses interest at once and suggests 
 something of the story.) 
 Seen from the Garden Wall. (Good, for reasons just given.) 
 
 XI (61). Picture Stories 
 
 (Santa Claus picture, p. 63) 
 
 Let the pupils study the lesson in their book 
 alone ; it should not be too difficult for them after 
 the picture stories they have told in preceding 
 
PICTURE STORIES 77 
 
 chapters. After the study, allow several to tell 
 their stories in their own way, just as they have 
 thought them out. Then you may offer sugges- 
 tions for improving the stories. Probably sugges- 
 tions will be chiefly needed to aid the children in 
 putting their stories into better form. 
 
 Perhaps some stories will run something like 
 this: 
 
 It was Christmas Eve. Will, Dick, and Lucy hung their 
 stockings by the fireplace and went off to bed. 
 
 " Don't go to sleep," said Dick. " Let us go into the sitting 
 room and wait by our stockings till Santa Claus comes, and then 
 we can tell him just what we want for Christmas." 
 
 " Good ! " said Lucy. " I want to tell him just what kind of 
 doll I want." 
 
 "No," said Will. "Don't go. Santa does not like children 
 to watch for him." 
 
 But Dick and Lucy would not listen to Will. They crept 
 softly into the sitting room and sat down before the fire to wait 
 for Santa. 
 
 Perhaps the remainder of the story will answer 
 the following questions : 
 
 How long did they have to wait? 
 
 At last what did they hear? 
 
 What did they say? 
 
 What did Santa say when he saw them? 
 
 (" Ah, ha ! There are Dick and Lucy waiting for me. I'll 
 go away and come back after they are asleep.") 
 
 What did Santa Claus do? 
 
 How did Dick and Lucy account for the noise they had 
 heard? (The wind, snowslide, etc.) 
 
78 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 What did they do? 
 
 When Santa returned what did he put in Dick's and Lucy's 
 stockings to show them that he did not like them to wait for 
 him? 
 
 What did he give Will ? 
 
 Did the children ever wait up for Santa Claus again? 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Have the Christmas story told from different 
 standpoints. Let the children choose freely who 
 they will be ; then see that they keep to their 
 chosen characters consistently in telling their story. 
 
 i. Let the little boy who watched for Santa tell 
 his story next day to one of his friends. 
 
 2. Let the little girl tell her story to one of her 
 friends. 
 
 3. Let Santa Claus tell the story as one of his 
 Christmas adventures. 
 
 See that every story told is given a suitable title. 
 
 XII (62). More Picture Stories 
 
 (The monkey and the mirror, p. 65) 
 
 After the pupils have studied the lesson in their 
 books alone for a few minutes, let several of them 
 try to tell the story. Help them only as much as 
 is necessary to bring their ideas into connected, 
 progressive order. 
 
 Encourage all signs of originality. Work for 
 brevity, life, point. If the children's stories soon 
 get to be all alike and expressed in the same Ian- 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 79 
 
 guage, you may be sure that they are not really 
 telling their own stories, but merely parroting the 
 stories of others. That must be stopped, even if, as 
 a last resort, you have to stop the exercise to do it. 
 
 As soon as the children's originality seems about 
 exhausted, tell them this y£sop fable. 
 
 The Dog and his Image 
 
 A dog with a piece of meat in his mouth was one day crossing 
 a stream. Looking down into the clear water he saw his own 
 image. The silly dog thought he saw another dog with another 
 piece of meat. He made up his mind to get the second piece 
 of meat, so he made a grab at his own shadow. But, in trying to 
 get the image of a piece of meat, he lost the real piece he already 
 had. 
 
 This fable will serve as a model. It will stimulate 
 the slower, less imaginative children ; it will show 
 the more original how to arrange and present their 
 ideas effectively. It will add a bit to the literary 
 material that all children should be accumulating. 
 
 After this fable has been told, discussed, and com- 
 pared with the stories suggested by the monkey and 
 mirror picture, have several children — particularly 
 some of the slower ones — tell their stories of the 
 monkey. Note the effect of the fable on their ren- 
 dering. 
 
 Have every child give an appropriate title to his 
 story. As an attractive or suggestive title is an 
 important part of any story, it is worth while to 
 spend a good deal of time in criticizing, modifying, 
 
80 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 and comparing titles until the best one is found. 
 Not all the stories, if they have any considerable 
 individuality, should be fitted with the title, The 
 Monkey and the Mirror; there might well be stories 
 that such titles as these would fit better : The Greedy 
 Monkey, The Two Monkeys, The Mirror s Trick, 
 What the Candles Saw, He Will Know Better Next 
 Time, He Will Never Do That Again. 
 
 XIII (66). Telling True Stories 
 
 Help children to make stories of their experiences 
 suggested by the questions in their book. (See 
 p. 44.) 
 
 XIV (67). A Class Exercise in Written Reproduction 
 
 Tell the children the following story: 
 
 One night some Indian children saw a star fall into a pond. 
 The next morning they found a new flower growing there. It 
 was sweet and white. It had a golden heart like a star. This 
 was our first water lily. 
 
 Let the exercise proceed somewhat as follows : 
 
 Teacher : What would be a good title for this story ? 
 
 The children are allowed to decide on one of several good 
 titles that will undoubtedly be given by them, such as The Star, 
 The Water Lily, or The First Water Lily ; perhaps they decide on 
 The Star. 
 
 Teacher: I will write the title on the board if you will tell me 
 just how to do it. (Pupils must be required to be definite and 
 exact.) 
 
CLASS EXERCISE IN WRITTEN REPRODUCTION 81 
 
 First Pupil: The, capital T-h-e ; The begins with a capital be- 
 cause it is the first word in a title. (Teacher writes.) 
 
 Second Pupil: Star, capital S-t-a-r ; Star begins with a capital 
 because it is an important word in a title. 
 
 Teacher : Give me the first sentence of the story, telling what 
 the Indian children saw one night. 
 
 (The teacher should insist on a good, clear sentence ; it may 
 well not be the same as the one used by the teacher in telling the 
 story.) 
 
 Third Pupil : One night some Indian children saw a star fall. 
 
 (Of course this is only a sentence that may be given. After any 
 satisfactory sentence for the beginning of the story has been given, 
 have that sentence repeated by the class in concert. Then let 
 the children stand, a row at a time, and each child in the row 
 give, in his turn, directions for writing the word of the sentence 
 that falls to him. The teacher writes as directed. No time should 
 be wasted in calling pupils by name, or even in calling " next.") 
 
 First Pupil : One, capital O-n-e ; One begins with a capital be- 
 cause it is the first word in a sentence. 
 
 Second Pupil: Night, n-i-g-h-t. 
 
 Third Pupil : Some, s-o-m-e. 
 
 Teacher : Indian, capital I-n-d-i-a-n ; Indian begins with a 
 capital because it is the name of a people. (This is all that it is 
 necessary to tell the children now ; later they will learn about the 
 use of capitals to begin proper names.) 
 
 In this manner the work continues until all the words of the 
 sentence have been spelled by the pupils and written by the 
 teacher. Finally, some pupil concludes the dictation with this 
 statement : " There must be a period at the end of this sentence 
 because it is a statement." The exercise is continued with other 
 sentences similarly dictated and spelled by the children and 
 written by the teacher, somewhat as follows : 
 
 Teacher : Give the second sentence, telling where the star fell. 
 
 A Pupil: It fell into a pond. 
 
 (Teacher writes as children spell the words.) 
 
82 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Teacher : Give the next sentence, telling what the Indian chil- 
 dren found the next morning. 
 
 A Pupil : The next morning the children found a new flower. 
 
 (Children spell ; teacher writes.) 
 
 Teacher : Give the next sentence, telling what kind of flower it 
 was. 
 
 A Pupil : It was sweet and white, and it had a star in its heart. 
 
 (Children spell; teacher writes.) 
 
 Teacher : Give the last sentence, telling what this new flower 
 was. 
 
 A Pupil: This flower was our first water lily. 
 
 (Pupils spell; teacher writes.) 
 
 When finished, the story on the board may be 
 something like this : 
 
 The Star 
 
 One night some Indian children saw a star fall. It fell into a 
 pond. The next morning the children found a new flower. It 
 was sweet and white, and it had a star in its heart. This flower 
 was our first water lily. 
 
 Of course no reproduction will work out exactly 
 like the above. The teacher should make no effort 
 to have it so. This exercise is given merely to 
 show concretely and in detail the essential features 
 of any exercise of this kind which is to be effective. 
 Some of these essential features may be summarized 
 as follows : 
 
 First, clear, definite, and complete thoughts must 
 be aroused in the children. Each thought must be 
 expressed in a sentence. Thoughts and sentences 
 must be arranged in logical order. The word 
 
CLASS EXERCISE IN WRITTEN REPRODUCTION 83 
 
 " sentence " is to be used by teacher and pupils 
 whenever speaking of a sentence. 
 
 Second, the exercise must engage the attention 
 and activity of the whole class. A few of the bright- 
 est children must not be allowed to do all, or even 
 most of the work. It is all within the capacity of 
 every child in the class; the slow and the dull must 
 be made to do their full share. If this is not done, 
 they will become still slower and duller ; they are not 
 yet too dull to observe that others are depended upon 
 for all the work — if such be the case — and they re- 
 spond as any one would do under similar conditions, 
 with inattention and lethargy. The exercise, espe- 
 cially the spelling and writing, should be conducted 
 rapidly, with energy and snap. Every child should be 
 taught to be ready and to respond promptly when his 
 turn comes, without waiting even to be called upon. 
 
 Third, every word should be spelled in the first 
 exercises of this kind. Later, the spelling of only 
 the more difficult words need be called for. It is to 
 be remembered that most mistakes made in written 
 spelling occur in the common, much-used words. 
 
 Fourth, every exercise of this kind is to be made to 
 afford the best kind of drill in the correct use of cap- 
 itals and marks of punctuation, as these are taught. 
 
 Finally, and in a word, the exercise is training the 
 children to think clearly and connectedly, to express 
 their thoughts clearly and definitely, and to put that 
 expression into mechanically correct form. 
 
84 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Have reproduced in the same way the story, The 
 Trees and the Woodcutter. (Pupil's book, p. 58.) 
 
 XV (67). Copying Story from the Board 
 
 Let the children copy the story, The Star, from 
 the blackboard. Before they begin, direct their 
 thoughts to certain things which the copying is de- 
 signed to make habitual. This may best be done by 
 asking such questions as these : 
 
 With what kind of letter does the first word of a title begin? 
 How do the important words in a title begin? 
 How does the first word of every sentence begin? 
 With what does every statement end? 
 
 Have pupils correct any mistakes at once, as 
 directed in previous lessons. Do not fail to get a 
 clear statement of the reason for every correction 
 before the pupil makes it. 
 
 XVI (67). Studying a Poem 
 
 Read the poem, Autumn Fires, to the children ; 
 read it so that they will see the pictures that each 
 stanza paints; read it so that they will feel the 
 atmosphere and the spirit of it. Have the children 
 read it, individually and in concert. 
 
 Study with the children the questions following 
 the poem. Ask other questions; encourage the 
 children to ask questions and to make comments, 
 
WRITING A STANZA FROM MEMORY 85 
 
 remembering that only relevant questions and com- 
 ments are allowable. 
 
 After the children have studied the last stanza 
 for a minute or two, as directed, let as many as can 
 say it, recite it aloud, the others listening. This 
 repetition will help to fix it in the minds of the 
 slower children who have perhaps not learned it 
 alone. After several have repeated it, the whole 
 class may say it together. 
 
 XVII (69). Writing a Stanza from Memory 
 
 This is a lesson for the teacher to study with the 
 children. Try to insure a reasonable degree of 
 success in writing the stanza from memory. This 
 may be done by seeing that the children try to re- 
 call the stanza as they are directed to do in their 
 book; that they look back to it, and study it care- 
 fully, if this seems necessary. It will do none of 
 them harm and it may aid many to have the stanza 
 repeated once or twice in concert, before any try to 
 write it from memory. Ask about the beginning of 
 each line and the mark at the end. In all of this, 
 remember that the best time to correct mistakes is 
 before they occur. 
 
 See that the pupils correct any mistakes by com- 
 paring their copy with the original. 
 
 Look over their statements to see that they are 
 correctly written and punctuated. Have any errors 
 corrected, as directed in previous lessons. 
 
CHAPTER FOUR 
 
 The careful preliminary study and comparison of 
 the work provided in this chapter with that already 
 given in preceding chapters — a study which should 
 invariably be made before entering on the work of 
 any chapter with the children — should impress you, 
 among other things, with the following: 
 
 1. The different kinds of exercises, once introduced, are 
 kept up from chapter to chapter. Instead of becoming 
 monotonous they become more interesting as children gain 
 in power — in originality and independence. As examples, 
 note the varied stories, fables, and myths, all intensely in- 
 teresting, that furnish material for conversation, study, 
 dramatizing, and reproduction; the use of riddles (Chapter 
 Two) in the study of questions, statements, and their marks 
 of punctuation; and the game of names (Chapter Four) in 
 teaching the writing of proper names. 
 
 2. Increasing originality and independence is expected 
 of the children in all the exercises — reading, study, dram- 
 atizing, reproducing. 
 
 3. The distinctly new work consists of the following 
 only: 
 
 (a) The use of capitals in the writing of proper names. 
 
 (b) The use of their and there; of to, too, and two, 
 
 86 
 
STUDY AND ORAL REPRODUCTION 87 
 
 I (71). Study and Oral Reproduction of the Fable, 
 "The Four Oxen 11 
 
 This is a lesson for the pupils to study carefully 
 in preparation for the oral reproduction. In their 
 book, they are told, in considerable detail, how to 
 study the lesson. It is of the utmost importance 
 that they study it systematically and carefully, as 
 directed. Probably many of them will need some 
 help, — a hint, a word of encouragement, a bit of 
 stimulus. This help should be individual; it should 
 be just sufficient — not too much — to enable the 
 pupil to do for himself. 
 
 Just because this lesson culminates in the oral 
 reproduction of the story, do not fall into the griev- 
 ous and common error of accepting — even of encour- 
 aging — the memorizing of the words by repeated 
 reading, by concentrating attention on these. It 
 is quite possible for a child, with two or three min- 
 utes' study, to reproduce this story glibly, without 
 having really read it, without having constructed the 
 picture in his mind at all. It is even possible for 
 the same child to answer the questions asked in his 
 book, and other similar questions. He does this 
 merely from word memory. This possibility will 
 become actuality in many cases, and that, too, with 
 the most capable children, if the teacher permits it. 
 
 Does a child hesitate and grope for a word ? Do 
 you help him by giving him a word, the next word? 
 
SS TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Does he, for instance, recite the first two sentences 
 of the story of the four oxen and the lion in the 
 words of the book ? Does he start the third sen- 
 tence, "But whenever "and stop; do you, or 
 
 does some pupil, help him out by saying, " the 
 oxen " ? Words, words, words ! Such an exercise 
 is worse than a waste of time and opportunity; it is 
 positively pernicious. It is training the child's 
 mind to carry on its processes with forms that lack 
 substance, with husks that cover no kernels; it is 
 starving instead of feeding the mind; its end is men- 
 tal vacuity, at best, or at worst, the ability to talk 
 without saying anything. 
 
 In a word, there is little or no value for the child — 
 there may be positive harm — in memorizing and 
 reproducing the words of this story. There is much 
 value in studying the story as the child's book 
 directs. By such study, the child is learning really to 
 read, to form in his mind the thoughts, the pictures, 
 which the words describe; to hold those pictures jn 
 mind, to examine, to analyze them freely ; and, finally, . 
 to describe the pictures in his own fitting words. 
 
 When it comes to the recitation, this must be 
 conducted in harmony with the study that has pre- 
 ceded. Encourage pupils to use their own language ; 
 commend originality of expression. Insist, only, 
 that the essential facts of the story be observed. 
 Encourage free and full expression, but put no 
 premium on verbosity. Do not commend a child 
 for much speaking, but for speaking effectively. 
 
THEIR AND THERE 89 
 
 Study again the suggestions and directions given 
 in previous chapters for conducting exercises in oral 
 reproduction (pp. 16, 42, 63). In the criticism, be 
 especially careful that every child knows just where- 
 in his work was good and wherein it should be 
 improved. In every effort at improvement, whether 
 of his own previous performance, or of the per- 
 formance of another, make sure that the child has a 
 clear conception of what he is trying to do. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Let the children study in a similar manner and 
 reproduce any short, suitable story. Some of the 
 stories already given in their book may be used, as 
 The Blind Men and the Elephant (p. 18), or The 
 Trees and the Woodcutter (p. 58). 
 
 II (73). Their and There 
 
 Study this lesson with the children. Just before 
 they copy the sentences, filling the blanks, give them 
 several sentences, orally, containing their and there, 
 and have them tell which word is used, spelling the 
 word and giving the reason for its use. For illus- 
 tration : 
 
 Teacher : The naughty kittens have lost their mittens. 
 
 Pupil: Their, t-h-e-i-r (spelling) ; because in that sentence 
 their means belonging to the kittens. 
 
 Teacher : Look up, little kittens, there are your mittens. 
 
 Pupil : There, t-h-e-r-e; because in that sentence there means 
 in that place. 
 
90 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Have pupils correct their written sentences as a 
 part of the exercise. Let them give the reason for 
 every correction before making it, as already directed 
 (p. 49). For example, if a child has used their in 
 the second sentence, he will say, when he discovers 
 his mistake, " I should use there in this sentence, 
 because it means in that place" and make the cor- 
 rection. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Additional sentences, with blanks to be filled 
 with there or their, may be written on the board. 
 
 2. Pupils may make original sentences, using 
 there or their in each. Teacher may assign subjects 
 about which to make these sentences, as, boys and 
 marbles, girls and hoops. 
 
 This work must be carefully done and rapidly 
 corrected. Neglect of the correction makes pupils 
 careless of errors, and their repetition fixes the habit. 
 If you have not time to see that these exercises are 
 done correctly, do not give them. They cannot be 
 safely used to " keep pupils busy "; it were far better 
 to let the pupils go out to play. These exercises 
 should never be required of pupils who already have 
 the habit of using these two words correctly; no 
 improvement is possible, so such exercises are a 
 waste of pupils' time at best. At worst, they invite 
 careless work, and foster the formation of bad hab- 
 its ; they make too little demand on the pupil to 
 hold him up to his best. 
 
WRITING THE STORY 91 
 
 III (75). Writing the Story, "The Pour Oxen" 
 
 See that each child understands how to study the 
 story preparatory to writing it. See that each one 
 does study it as directed. Give individual help 
 when needed. 
 
 Do not try to keep the children together in this 
 study. It is an individual matter. Some will know 
 how to spell all words with little or no study, others 
 will have to study many words ; some will be pre- 
 pared to write much sooner than others. All should 
 be provided with paper and pencil at the beginning 
 of the exercise ; each one should be allowed to write 
 as soon as he thinks he is ready. 
 
 In this preparation, and in the writing of this 
 story, the children will need your full attention. 
 Watch especially the work of the poorer pupils. 
 Anticipate their tendency to disregard the division 
 of the story into sentences, by having them write 
 complete answers to a series of questions suitable to 
 bring out connected statements, as : 
 
 Where did the four oxen feed? (Four oxen fed together in a 
 field.) 
 
 What did a lion try to do? (A lion tried to kill one of the 
 oxen.) 
 
 What did the oxen do ? (The oxen stood together and shook 
 their horns at the lion.) 
 
 Do not hamper with such questions the work of 
 any child who is able to write good sentences with- 
 
92 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 out them. They are but crutches, to be leaned 
 upon only as a last resort. 
 
 Each child's paper is to be criticized for the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 i. The completeness and clearness of the story. 
 
 2. The use of capitals and period. 
 
 3. The spelling. 
 
 4. The appearance of the paper, — arrangement, neatness, 
 penmanship. 
 
 Criticizing — let it always be remembered — means 
 commending, when that is possible, quite as much 
 as it means censuring, or pointing out faults. 
 
 While the points for criticism, as given above, 
 may, at first thought, seem rather numerous and 
 formidable, a moment's reflection will show you that 
 they are merely the result of the briefest analysis of 
 the essentials in which the goodness or the poorness 
 of the child's work consists. It may seem simpler 
 to say to the child, " Good," or, " Poor ; try to do 
 better next time." But such criticism is simple 
 only for the teacher ; for the child, it is merely the 
 source of unintelligent pleasure or discouragement. 
 It is not enlightening ; it does not point the way to 
 definite and sure improvement. 
 
 A paper may be neat in appearance, correct in 
 spelling, and in the use of capitals and period, but 
 lacking in completeness or clearness of statement. 
 This the writer, or any other child, may be made to 
 see by questioning, or by comparing the paper with 
 
WRITING THE STORY 93 
 
 another that is complete and clear. So may the 
 quality of any paper, in the other respects, be brought 
 out clearly to every child, by questioning and by 
 comparison. Of course, the comparison of papers 
 must be made tactfully. 
 
 It is true that such definite, detailed criticism 
 means much painstaking work for the teacher. It 
 is easier to gather up the results of the pupils' efforts, 
 glance them over, make a few general comments on 
 the papers as a whole, and drop them all quietly 
 into the wastebasket ; and this process may be 
 repeated, day after day, with little exertion or thought 
 on the teacher's part. But this is not teaching 
 children to think or to write ; it is not teaching 
 them to take any intelligent satisfaction or interest 
 in their work. 
 
 Progress in language maybe just as sure and almost 
 as definitely noticeable as progress in learning the 
 multiplication table. But such progress depends 
 upon the intelligent doing of definite things every 
 day, in every exercise ; upon the intelligent and 
 definite criticism of the pupils' definite efforts ; and 
 upon definite, intelligent attempts to do definite 
 things better at each trial. The pupil must be held 
 up to his best all the time ; he must be made to apply 
 everything that he has learned, and to apply it not 
 merely in the lesson in which he has learned it, but 
 whenever there is occasion. Thus does the child 
 become helpfully critical of his own work. He 
 
94 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 takes intelligent delight in the realization of his 
 growing powers. 
 
 Each pupil should correct his own work, if possible 
 at once. (See directions, p. 49.) 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 In most classes it will be advisable soon to have 
 another short story reproduced in writing. For 
 this reproduction the following story may be used. 
 Let this be written upon the board, studied by the 
 children under the teacher's direction, and finally 
 written and criticized as has just been directed. 
 
 The First Fountain 
 
 Flora was a little girl who liked to play in the water. One day 
 she was wading in a little stream. She played until she grew 
 tired. Then she tried to step out on the bank. But her feet 
 were held fast. Her hair became little streams of water. A fairy 
 had turned her into a fountain. 
 
 IV (76). The Use of Capitals in Writing the Names 
 of Persons 
 
 The one new point in this lesson is the writing of 
 personal names with capitals ; the rest is a review of 
 the use of capitals in titles and at the beginning 
 of sentences, and the use of the period at the end 
 of statements. See that the pupils study the lesson 
 through carefully as directed ; test them upon this 
 in oral recitation. 
 
 Then tell them about the game of names de- 
 
THE GAME OF NAMES 95 
 
 scribed and to be played in the next lesson. As a 
 preparation for this, have every child write his name 
 on the blackboard ; let only full names be written, 
 not initials. Have the names spelled from the 
 board by the children, each child spelling the name 
 of some other child. Call attention to the capital 
 beginning every name, and insist that the child 
 spelling say " capital " before naming the first letter 
 of a name. 
 
 Leave the children's names on the board until 
 the next lesson, or better, rewrite them yourself in 
 columns as they are spelled from the board by the 
 children. Let the pupils understand that those 
 who learn how to spell the largest number of names 
 correctly before the next lesson, and who are careful 
 about the capitals, will be most successful in the 
 game. 
 
 V (77). The Game of Names 
 
 The game of names is played as follows : 
 
 Harry Brown : Mary Smith, spell my name. 
 
 Mary Smith : Harry Brown, capital-H-a-r-r-y, capital- B-r-o-w-n. 
 John Pope, spell my name. 
 
 John Pope: Mary Smith, capital-M-a-r-y, s-m-i-t-h. 
 
 Mary Smith : No, that is not the way to spell my name. 
 Frank Ball, spell my name. 
 
 Frank Ball: Mary Smith, capital-M-a-r-y, capital-S-m-i-t-h. 
 Charles Marsh, spell my name. 
 
 And so the game continues as long as desirable. 
 The one who makes a mistake loses his chance to 
 
96 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 call upon another. If the one whose name is mis- 
 spelled does not notice the mistake at once, and 
 calls upon some one else to spell his name, any other 
 child may note the mistake, by saying, " No, that is 
 
 not the way to spell 's name," and spell 
 
 the name correctly. Then the child making the 
 correction may call on another to spell his name. 
 
 VI (yy). Writing Names 
 
 Have pupils correct mistakes as part of the exer- 
 cise, giving reason for correction. 
 
 The second part of the exercise, writing the 
 names of as many classmates as possible, may be 
 turned into a game. Allow a certain number of 
 minutes for this, say ten. The one that writes the 
 largest number of names correctly wins ; incorrectly 
 written names are not counted. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 i. Pupils may write names from dictation. 
 
 2. They may write a certain number of names, 
 either of people they know, or names that they 
 may invent. 
 
 VII (77). Copying 
 
 Fordirectionsand suggestions regarding the super- 
 vision of an exercise in copying and the correction 
 of errors, see p. 48, VII. The teacher must work 
 with the children throughout this exercise. 
 
THE USE OF TWO, TOO, AND TO 97 
 
 VIII (78). Dictation 
 Give pupils not more than two minutes to look 
 carefully at and to read to themselves the story, 
 Kindness (p. 76), in preparation for writing it from 
 dictation. That they may have prominently in mind 
 the principal things on account of which the dicta- 
 tion is given, ask the following questions : 
 
 Where are capital letters used in titles? 
 With what kind of letter must every sentence begin? 
 With what mark must every statement end? 
 With what kind of letter must every name of a person begin? 
 How are these words spelled (giving those that you think may 
 cause trouble) ? 
 
 Dictate complete sentences. Dictate slowly and 
 distinctly. Secure perfect attention and expect 
 pupils to get the sentence from a single dictation. 
 Have pupils repeat the sentence distinctly, in con- 
 cert, before beginning to write. Have errors cor- 
 rected as part of the exercise. For further direc- 
 tions and suggestions about dictation exercises and 
 the correction of errors, see pp. 48-50. 
 
 IX (78). The Use of Two, Too, and To ' 
 
 Study this lesson with the children. It is easy 
 for them to learn when to use two, the word mean- 
 ing a number. 
 
 The use of too is not so easy to express. Chil- 
 dren will learn it better from example than from 
 
98 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 rule. Have them study carefully the sentences 
 given in their book in which too is used. Make 
 for them other similar sentences, orally, and have 
 them give the spelling of too. 
 
 The use of to is still more difficult to explain, 
 and no explanation should be attempted. The 
 best practical rule for the correct use of these 
 troublesome little words that can be impressed 
 upon the children is that they should use to only 
 when two or too will not do. Two is almost never, 
 too, seldom, mistakenly used; the tendency is to use 
 to indiscriminately. Insist that the children never 
 use to until they are sure that it is not two, nor too, 
 that they need. 
 
 Before the children copy the sentences, filling 
 the blanks, dictate to them many sentences in 
 which to, too, and two are used. Have the pupils 
 decide which word is used and spell it orally. 
 Teach them to think of the sentences given in 
 their books as types with which they can compare 
 other sentences when in doubt. For instance, 
 perhaps you have given the sentence, " You have 
 torn your book ; it is too bad." A child may spell 
 the word too, t-o. Let him recall the sentences in 
 his book : " The chair is too high ; " "I go to school 
 to learn." Which too is used in too bad? Is it 
 like too high, or like to school or to learn ? 
 
 Have errors in copying the sentences and filling 
 the blanks corrected as part of the exercise. As 
 
DICTATION 99 
 
 reasons for the correction may be given in the case 
 of two that it means the number two; in the case of 
 too, that it is like too big, and too high, or like you, 
 too; and in the possible case of to that it is neither 
 too nor two. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 i. Write on the board several connected sen- 
 tences with blanks for the words to, too, and two. 
 Let pupils copy and fill blanks. Do not give puz- 
 zling sentences. 
 
 2. Give pupils a subject, as The Cat and Her 
 Kittejis, and let pupils write three or more con- 
 nected sentences on that subject, using the words 
 to, too, and two. 
 
 Observe strictly what has been said about sup- 
 plementary work (p. 70). 
 
 X (80). Dictation to Drill and Test the Use of Two, 
 Too, To, Their, and There 
 
 In preparation for the dictation of the sentences 
 below, which are to be written, give several sentences 
 using the words to, too, two, there, and their, and 
 have pupils spell orally the word that is used. 
 
 Two little kittens were lost. 
 
 Their mother had told them to stay at home. 
 
 They were too little to go out alone. 
 
 Their mother found them over there in the woods. 
 
 As part of the exercise, have pupils correct their 
 papers, telling why the correct form is to be used. 
 
ioo TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Write the words two, to, too, there, their, on 
 the board in a column, in any order. Go around 
 the class rapidly, in order, calling on each child to 
 give a sentence in which one of the above words is 
 used. When he gives his sentence, he must spell 
 the word he has used, and tell why that word is 
 used. For example : 
 
 Child : I saw two robins in a tree. Two, t-w-o ; because this, 
 word means the number two. 
 
 2. The above exercise may be turned into an 
 interesting game by dividing the class into two 
 groups, as in a spelling match. Let the sentences 
 be given in order by the children, alternating from 
 side to side. If a child is unable to give a sentence 
 when his turn comes, or if he makes a mistake in 
 the spelling of a word, or in the reason for its use, 
 the child whose turn it is on the opposing side may 
 give a sentence, or make the correction. If he is 
 successful, the leader of his side draws one child 
 from the losing side. 
 
 3. One child may give a sentence using one of 
 the words, two, to, too, their, or there. Another child 
 may spell the word used, and give the reason for his 
 spelling. This exercise may be varied in several 
 ways. It may go around the class in regular order. 
 Or the child giving a sentence may call upon any 
 other child to spell the word and give the reason for 
 
ENLARGING A STORY FOR DR^JVTATlZiN^ idi 
 
 it ; if he does this correctly, he may give a sentence 
 to any other child, and so on. Whenever a child 
 makes a mistake, he loses his opportunity to give a 
 sentence ; the one who corrects him gives a sen- 
 tence. Or the class may be divided into two groups 
 as in (2), introducing competition between the two 
 sides. 
 
 In all the above exercises, encourage the children 
 to give connected sentences ; if they are able to do 
 it, this may be a requirement. For example : 
 
 First Child : I saw two kittens. 
 
 Second Child : They were out there under the tree. 
 
 Third Child: I tried to catch them. 
 
 Fourth Child : They were too spry for me. 
 
 Fifth Child : They ran away to their mother. 
 
 XI (80). Enlarging a Story for Dramatizing; Pupils' 
 Preparatory Study 
 
 Start the pupils in the study of the story, The 
 First Buttercups, preparatory to its dramatization. 
 Read the story with them. Talk with them about the 
 changes that must be made in order to prepare the 
 story for dramatizing. Help them to answer some 
 of the first questions, to make sure that they under- 
 stand them and can answer them. Let them study 
 through the whole lesson, with such individual help 
 as they may require. Do not give them too much 
 help ; this robs them of the opportunity of using 
 their own imaginations. 
 
102 TMQEiER'S MANUAL 
 
 XII (82). Enlarging a Story for Dramatizing; 
 Class Exercise 
 
 Have pupils answer the questions that they studied 
 for their last lesson. Keep before them the idea 
 that their answers must show just what the actors, in 
 playing the story, might do and say. 
 
 In preparation for this exercise, you should pre- 
 pare yourself just as carefully as you expect the 
 pupils to prepare themselves. Following the ques- 
 tions in their book, you should think out carefully 
 the whole story, in all its details, as it might work 
 out. Then you should keep this story in your 
 mind — be sure to keep it in your mind, do not im- 
 pose it on the children — as a guide for yourself in 
 bringing out from the children a complete, clear, and 
 connected narrative. 
 
 Here is one way in which the story was worked 
 out by one class, following the questions given in 
 the pupils' book. The numbers in parenthesis cor- 
 respond to the numbers opposite the questions in the 
 pupils' book. 
 
 A man set out to find the end of the rainbow. 
 
 (1) He carried a spade over his shoulder. (2, 3, 4) After 
 walking a long way he cried, " Here is the end of the rainbow at 
 last ! I have heard that there is a pot of gold buried in the earth 
 here. I will dig and dig until I get it." 
 
 (5) After digging for some time he found the gold. He 
 lifted it out, saying, " What a lot of gold ! What shall I do with 
 it? I will carry it into the woods and bury it." 
 
 (6, 7, 8) He put the gold into a bag and started for the woods, 
 
ENLARGING A STORY FOR DRAMATIZING 103 
 
 saying to himself, " How rich I am ! I will keep every bit of this 
 gold for myself. Nobody shall have one piece of it." 
 
 (g) Little did the selfish man know that there was a hole in 
 his bag ! As he hurried across the fields on the way to the woods, 
 bit by bit the gold dropped out until he had no gold left. 
 
 (10, 11, 12) A little fairy was watching the man. She said, 
 " What a pity such a selfish man should have all that gold. I am 
 sure he will do no good with it." 
 
 (13, 14) When she saw the gold fall, she said, "There, he has lost 
 his gold and I am glad. I will change the gold into bright golden 
 flowers. They will make every one who looks on them glad." 
 
 (15) So saying, the little fairy flew from gold piece to gold 
 piece touching each with her wand. At the touch of the wand, 
 every gold piece turned into a golden flower. 
 
 (16) "There," said the little fairy as she flew away, "I 
 have made those dear flowers for the little children." 
 
 (17) When the man opened his bag and found no gold, he 
 cried, " Why, where is all my gold ? " On looking more closely 
 he saw the hole. 
 
 (18) "Ah, now I know," he said. "It has dropped through 
 this hole. I will go back and look for it." 
 
 (19) Back to the field hurried the man. He searched and 
 searched, but not a piece of his gold did he ever find. 
 
 Just as he was leaving the field the little fairy flew to him. 
 
 (20, 21) " See these bright flowers," she said, pointing to the 
 golden flowers. " Do you know how they came to be here ? 
 They were your gold pieces. I saw you drop them and I changed 
 them into buttercups for the children, because I wanted the gold 
 to make ever so many people happy. You were selfish. You 
 would give none to others." 
 
 The man looked at the fairy for a moment, then at the golden 
 buttercups. 
 
 (22) At last he turned slowly away, saying to himself, "The 
 flowers are very bright and beautiful. They will make the 
 children happy. I think the fairy is right." 
 
104 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 After the children have answered the questions, 
 connect their answers into a complete story. Tell 
 them this story from beginning to end. Let this 
 be the children's story, as nearly as may be, not the 
 story that you worked out for yourself, and certainly 
 not the story that is here given merely for illustration. 
 
 XIII (82). Dramatizing the Story, "The First 
 Buttercups " 
 
 If the dramatizing up to this time has been car-, 
 ried out as directed, if the children have been allowed 
 to take the initiative, they should have gained con- 
 siderable confidence and skill in planning and acting 
 out a simple story, like this one of the first buttercups. 
 Tell them the story again, without question or com- 
 ment, as it was worked out at the last lesson. Then 
 let them dramatize it. Let them choose the ones to 
 take part; then let the chosen ones carry it out as 
 they think it should be done. Show your confidence 
 in the little actors ; give only help enough to prevent 
 a complete failure, if this should seem imminent. 
 
 When the first dramatization is completed, let 
 the children discuss the merits of it, suggesting 
 definitely wherein it should be improved. Then 
 let them choose a new set of actors to reenact the 
 story with the improvements suggested. It may be 
 thus repeated as many times as seem desirable, but 
 always with certain definite ideas for improvement. 
 It must not become perfunctory and mechanical. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 105 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 The story may be told orally by several children. 
 Do not insist that it be told as you told it, or as it 
 was played ; encourage variation ; commend orig- 
 inality ; it is only essential that the chief events of 
 the story be in substantial agreement with those of 
 the original, and that it be clear, connected, and 
 complete. 
 
 XIV (82). Picture Stories 
 
 (Puppy-dog pictures, p. 83) 
 
 After the children have studied the lesson in 
 their books, have the story told in three parts. 
 
 Part I. Saving the Puppy's Life (upper picture). 
 
 Part II. Playmates (between the pictures). 
 
 This part may be told by the teacher if pupils 
 have not worked it out well. Tell how the boy and 
 the dog became fast friends, playing and growing 
 up together. After two or three years the puppy 
 was a full-grown dog, while the boy was still small. 
 
 Part III. Saving the Boy's Life (lower pic- 
 ture). 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. In connection with this story tell the children 
 the fables, The Lion and the Mouse, and The 
 Dove and the Ant. Have them compare the three 
 stories, noting what is common to them all. Be 
 sure to have the fact clearly brought out that the boy 
 saved the puppy's life, the dove the ant's life, and 
 
106 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the lion the mouse's life, without thought of any ser- 
 vice in return. Each was prompted solely by kind- 
 ness toward a helpless and suffering creature. The 
 fables will serve as models of form for the children 
 which they will tend to follow, even unconsciously. 
 2. Tell the story of Androclus and the Lion. 
 
 XV (86). More Picture Stories 
 
 (Girl with kitten, p. 87) 
 
 This, like the preceding picture, should develop 
 a story that will be an excellent lesson on kindness 
 to animals. 
 
 After the children have studied the lesson a few 
 minutes by themselves, help them to develop a con- 
 nected, complete story. Perhaps it will follow an 
 outline something like this: 
 
 Little girl sent to grocer's by her mother ; two little children 
 stand on steps crying ; coming nearer, the girl sees a poor, fright- 
 ened kitten crouching in a corner, while a big boy is about to 
 throw a stone at it ; girl rushes in and rescues the kitten ; tells the 
 boy only a coward would do such a thing ; boy feels ashamed and 
 promises never again to be so cruel to a helpless animal ; girl 
 gives kitten up to children to whom it belongs — or takes it home 
 and cares for it — or the boy takes it and is kind to it. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. The story may be continued like the story of 
 the rescued puppy. The kitten may save the girl's 
 — or the boy's — life by waking her when the 
 house is on fire. 
 
TELLING A STORY FROM A POEM 107 
 
 2. The boy may have a dream. He dreams he 
 is a kitten and a big boy is stoning him. How 
 does he feel ? When he wakes, what does he re- 
 solve to do ? 
 
 3. The story may be dramatized. 
 
 XVI (86). Telling True Stories 
 
 Talk with the children about different ways of 
 repaying kindness, ways that they have seen or that 
 they can think of. If children have had little ex- 
 perience of gratitude, let them prepare for this exer- 
 cise to be taken up later — after a week or two; let 
 them seek and embrace opportunities to show grat- 
 itude to parents, teachers, classmates, friends. 
 
 Obviously, the ethical value of exercises of this 
 kind, made practical, is not less than their language 
 value. 
 
 XVII (88). Studying a Poem 
 
 Study the poem, The First Bluebell, with the 
 children. First, read it to them. Then have it 
 read aloud -by one or more of the best readers. 
 
 Note that the questions are arranged in groups, 
 each group referring to a stanza of the poem. See 
 that the pupils observe this; it will help them in 
 their efforts to answer the questions. 
 
 XVIII (90). Telling a Story from a Poem 
 
 After the pupils have had a few minutes — five 
 to eight should be enough — to study the poem, 
 
108 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The First Bluebell, and to think out the story in it 
 in their own words, have several children tell it. 
 In the discussion of each child's story, by yourself 
 and the other children, be sure that the comments 
 are definite, so that every one may understand both 
 the good and the weak points of the stories. 
 
CHAPTER FIVE 
 
 Make a preliminary study of this chapter to see 
 how it carries on, enlarges, develops, all the funda- 
 mental ideas of preceding chapters ; how it provides 
 for drill in all forms already taken up ; how it sus- 
 tains and stimulates interest and effort through 
 varied exercises. The new work is as follows : 
 
 1. Quotations and quotation marks : studying their use, 
 copying, writing from dictation, writing original quotations. 
 
 2. The use of the comma to separate a quotation from 
 the rest of the sentence. 
 
 3. Writing an original ending for an unfinished story. 
 
 4. More definite words to be used in place of said, 
 
 I (91). Reading 
 
 Read with the children the story, The Little 
 White Flower. After reading it through for the 
 story, assign parts, and have it read in dialogue 
 form. -Have nothing perfunctory about this exer- 
 cise ; get every child into the spirit of it. The 
 thought and the vocabulary are so easy and so 
 familiar that every child should be able to take any 
 one of the parts and to put into it something of origi- 
 nality, of individuality in conception and rendering. 
 
 109 
 
no TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Read again carefully the suggestions given in 
 Chapter Three (p. 65) for the reading of the story, 
 Mabel and the Fairy Folk. See that the discussion, 
 criticism, and rereading of the various parts are 
 carried out here as there suggested. 
 
 II (95). Studying the Story, "the Little White 
 Flower " 
 
 The children are to study this lesson by them-, 
 selves. This does not mean that they will need no 
 attention from the teacher, or merely enough to see 
 that they are quiet and apparently busy. On the 
 contrary, they will need the teacher's closest atten- 
 tion and keenest insight. They are learning how 
 to study ; they are forming the habit of intelligent 
 study ; at least, such is the purpose of this exercise. 
 If it is not serving this purpose, it is wasting the 
 children's time, and worse than wasting it. 
 
 To make the exercise fully successful you must 
 see that the children clearly understand the direc- 
 tions of their book, that they are answering to them- 
 selves intelligently the questions that their book 
 asks them. To do this, go about from pupil to 
 pupil — especially among the poorer pupil-s —and 
 speak with them individually; a hint, a question, or 
 a suggestion, will help to reveal to you just what a 
 child is doing, and to show him what he ought to 
 do. 
 
 In their book, the pupils are told that they may 
 
CONVERSATION AND DRAMATIZING in 
 
 ask the teacher to help them with any question that 
 troubles them. If you are not getting at least a few 
 requests for such help, there is probably something 
 wrong. Find out what it is, and correct it. 
 
 Ill (98). Conversation and Dramatizing 
 Conversation. 
 
 In this exercise the pupils are to be called upon 
 to show the results of their study of the story, 
 The Little White Flower. The questions in 
 their book, which they answered to themselves, 
 should be asked, yet this must not be made a formal 
 exercise which serves merely to test their knowl- 
 edge and the faithfulness of their study. Every one, 
 teacher and pupils, should feel free to express his 
 ideas, to ask questions, for the purpose of develop- 
 ing together clear and full conceptions of the char- 
 acters of the story, to bring out what each of these 
 characters said and did, and just how he said it and 
 did it. 
 
 To insure this freedom, the teacher must be fully 
 prepared for the exercise. She should know the 
 story so thoroughly, she should know so well the 
 questions that the pupils have studied in their book, 
 she should be so ready with questions and sugges- 
 tions of her own, that she will need no book before 
 her, that she will have no time to use a book. 
 
 Above all else, the children must be given oppor- 
 tunity to show how they think the different things 
 
112 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 in the story should be done, when it is played, and 
 to ask to have different things shown, as they were 
 directed in the latter part of their study lesson. 
 Every child should take part in this, if possible, both 
 by representing something himself and by calling 
 for the representation of something. The teacher 
 should be fully prepared to supplement the pupils' 
 efforts and requests. Here are a few things that 
 should be shown, some of which the children may 
 not think of. 
 
 Show how little Tom stood while the men were telling of the 
 gifts they had for the queen. 
 
 Show how Tom walked away from the market place. 
 
 Show how the wind fairies circled around the little plant. 
 
 Show how the wind fairies rushed. 
 
 Show how the rain fairies pattered. 
 
 Show how the sunshine fairies glided. 
 
 Show how the little bud had her face covered at first ; how 
 she opened one little petal ; how she burst into full bloom ; and 
 how she laughed at the sun fairies. 
 
 Show how the men presented their gifts to the queen; and 
 how they left her. 
 
 Dramatizing the story. 
 
 Show your confidence in- your pupils by allow- 
 ing them to do all they can unaided. Let them 
 decide how many will be required to take the 
 parts, and let them, under your direction, assign the 
 parts. 
 
 After the story has been played once, and after 
 the performance has been discussed, and definite 
 
QUOTATIONS 113 
 
 suggestions made for improvement, another set of 
 children sufficient to take all the parts may be al- 
 lowed to leave the room, assign the parts among 
 themselves, return, and give the play before the 
 teacher and the remainder of the class. 
 
 Read again suggestions for an exercise in conver- 
 sation and dramatizing (pp. 11, 38, 67). 
 
 IV (99). Oral Reproduction 
 
 In the oral reproduction of the story, The Little 
 White Flower, follow the directions given for oral 
 reproduction of a story in Chapter Two (p. 42). 
 
 V (99). Quotations 
 
 This is the first lesson on quotations. This sub- 
 ject is not taken up thus early — earlier than most 
 teachers or textbooks present it — for the sake of 
 extending the endless exercises that are wont to be 
 given to it throughout the elementary school grades, 
 and too often without satisfactory results, but rather 
 that the children may learn the use of quotations, 
 and fix the habit of writing quotations correctly, 
 before they have blundered carelessly into the habit 
 of writing them incorrectly. Presented simply and 
 clearly, the subject is not difficult for third grade 
 children to understand. And if these children are 
 held rigidly from the first to writing quotations 
 always correctly, as they learn how to write them, 
 
H4 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 they will soon fix the habit. Then it will be quite 
 unnecessary to waste time in teaching over and 
 over again, year after year, the proper use of quota- 
 tion marks. 
 
 In their original work, pupils use direct quotations. 
 They must be taught now how to write them cor- 
 rectly ; it is easier to teach correct form at the out- 
 set and to insist upon its use than to correct errors 
 later. 
 
 In studying this lesson in their book with them, 
 make perfectly sure that the pupils understand from 
 the beginning just what the quotation is, not by 
 memorizing the definition, but by distinguishing in 
 every instance exactly what the concrete quotation 
 under discussion is, and who says the words of which 
 it is composed. To secure this perfect, understand- 
 ing, supplement, if necessary, the questions in the 
 pupils' book with questions that will bring the most 
 detailed and definite answers possible. Your ques- 
 tions, at first, must be as definite, as this : 
 
 Is any one speaking? (Insist on the answer " yes " or "no.") 
 Who is speaking? 
 What does he say ? 
 Put your fingers around what he says. 
 What do we call those words? 
 What marks are around them? 
 Point to those marks and tell their name. 
 
 What mark is used to separate the quotation from the rest of 
 the sentence? 
 
 Put your finger on the comma. 
 
QUOTATIONS 115 
 
 Find the comma in the next sentence. 
 
 What does the comma do? (Separates the quotation from the 
 rest of the sentence.) • 
 
 Read the quotation. (This may be by class or by individuals. 
 Have quotations read in different sentences until pupils respond 
 promptly, read the quotation, the whole quotation, and not one 
 word more.) 
 
 Read the rest of the sentence. (Give this command after the 
 pupil, or pupils, have paused long enough at the end of the quota- 
 tion to make it evident that they know that they have finished it.) 
 
 Have pupils go to the board and make quotation 
 marks and commas. 
 
 In all this study with the pupils, work fast. 
 Questions and answers must be clear, rapid, spirited, 
 definite, to the point. Children must not be given 
 time to dawdle. They need to think, but no long 
 train of thought is needed to answer any question 
 that should be asked. If kept awake and attentive 
 by a sufficiently rapid fire of questions, they can 
 answer every question almost instantly, if they can 
 answer it at all. Five minutes' spirited, concen- 
 trated work will accomplish more than a half hour 
 of dawdling. 
 
 Let one child be the cat and another the owl. 
 Let these children read the quotations in the story, 
 nothing more, each one reading his part. 
 
 The form for studying a direct quotation given in 
 the pupils' book (p. 100) should be followed exactly, 
 in this and in future lessons. Experience has proved 
 this to be the most effective way of teaching children 
 
n6 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 to write quotations correctly, far more effective than 
 any definition and rule; at the same time the study 
 of sentences by this form insures a clear analysis 
 and sure grasp of the thought. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Short stories, full of conversation, may be written 
 on the blackboard and studied in the same way that 
 we have taken up The Cat and the Owl. The 
 quotations must be brief, unbroken, and come at the 
 beginning of the sentences in which they occur. 
 
 VI (103). Copying to Learn the Writing of Quotations 
 
 Have children copy the story, The Cat and the 
 Owl. See that they first read carefully and fully 
 understand the directions that are given them in 
 their book. Then see that they work according 
 to these directions. Pass from desk to desk, and 
 with a word or a question keep every one up to 
 the best work of which he is capable. Thus help 
 the children to avoid most of the errors that they 
 might otherwise make, and have them correct at 
 once those that do occur. As the attention of a 
 child is called to an error, it is not enough that he 
 tell what he should have written, and make the cor- 
 rection ; you must invariably insist that he tell why 
 the correction should be made. For instance, you 
 may find the quotation marks omitted at the end of 
 
DICTATION TO TEACH WRITING OF QUOTATIONS 117 
 
 the quotation in the second sentence. When the 
 child is led to discover this omission, he must speak 
 in substance as follows ; the exact words are not 
 essential : " There should be quotation marks around 
 Good evening, for those are the exact words spoken 
 by the cat. I have made these marks only at the 
 beginning of those words; I must make them at the 
 end, too." Then the child puts in the missing 
 marks. 
 
 It is unnecessary and unwise to run the risk of 
 confusing the child by telling him that when a 
 quotation is put in italics, which was not in italics 
 in the original, the quotation marks may be omitted. 
 Though there are numerous instances of this in the 
 pupils' book, — for examples, see pages 199, 271, and 
 272, — the pupil in his writing will have no occasion 
 to depart from the general rule that quotations must 
 be indicated by quotation marks. 
 
 The directions and suggestions already given 
 (p. 48) for a copying lesson are equally applicable 
 here. 
 
 VII (104). Dictation to Teach the Writing of 
 Quotations 
 
 Before dictating the story, The Cat a?id the Owl, 
 have children open their books to the story ; ques- 
 tion them rapidly for two or three minutes about the 
 placing of the quotation marks and the comma. It 
 
n8 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 will be well to ask questions also about the use of 
 capitals in the title and at the beginning of sentences, 
 and the use of the period at the end of the state- 
 ments. Everything that the children have learned 
 to do, they must consciously remember to do every 
 time there is occasion, — until the doing of it be- 
 comes a habit, automatic. 
 
 Following this preliminary questioning, the dicta- 
 tion may be given in one of two ways. By the first 
 way, the story may be dictated from beginning to end, 
 starting with the title, just as previous dictations 
 have been given ; the teacher reads a full sentence, 
 pupils repeat it distinctly after her, then write it. 
 
 A second way, which is far the better way with 
 most classes, is as follows. After dictating, as usual, 
 the title and the first sentence, in which there is no 
 quotation, the teacher reads the second sentence, the 
 pupils repeat it, but before writing it there is inter- 
 jected a series of questions and answers like these: 
 
 Teacher : Is any one speaking ? 
 Pupils : Yes, the cat is speaking. 
 Teacher : What does the cat say ? 
 Pupils : Good evening. 
 Teacher : What are those words called ? 
 Pupils : A quotation. 
 
 Teacher : What must you put around those words ? 
 Pupils : Quotation marks. 
 
 Teacher : How will you separate the quotation from the rest of 
 the sentence ? 
 
 Pupils : With a comma. 
 
DICTATION TO TEACH WRITING OF QUOTATIONS 119 
 
 Teacher : "Good evening," said the cat. 
 Pupils : "Good evening," said the cat. 
 Teacher: Write. 
 
 The same process of dictation and questioning is 
 pursued with each of the following sentences. The 
 purpose of this slow and painstaking work — if 
 questions and answers are sharp and rapid it will 
 not be monotonous — is to secure from every pupil 
 a consciously correct performance, to make certain 
 that these first exercises shall trace in every pupil's 
 mind and muscle the paths of right habits. This is 
 mainly a teaching and learning, not a testing exer- 
 cise. Testing has its appropriate place after, not 
 before, something has been taught and learned. 
 
 Obviously, a compromise between these two plans 
 of dictation may be readily made ; the questioning 
 on the quotation may be taken up in connection 
 with only a part of the sentences, never omitting it 
 with the first one containing a quotation. Probably 
 in classes composed mainly of bright, quick chil- 
 dren, such a compromise wall be found desirable. 
 
 When all, or a considerable number, of the quota- 
 tion sentences are subjected to this close question- 
 ing, it will be impossible to complete the exercise in 
 a fifteen or twenty minute period. Only so much 
 should be dictated as can be written and corrected 
 within the time allotted for the exercise. Preserve 
 the papers, pass them out and finish the exercise at 
 the next lesson. 
 
120 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The correction of the pupil's efforts, and the 
 method of securing it, are not less important than 
 the dictation and the method of conducting it. In 
 the dictation, the aim was to secure a correct per- 
 formance, to avoid errors ; in the correction of such 
 errors as have been made — the more painstaking 
 the dictation, the fewer these will be — the aim 
 must be to secure their correction in a way that will 
 prevent the repetition of the errors. Thus their 
 errors are used to teach pupils correct habits. So 
 important is this matter, we give in some detail a 
 method of treating errors effectively. 
 
 Suppose a pupil has omitted quotation marks ; 
 ask, and have him answer correctly, questions like 
 these : Is any one speaking ? Who ? What does 
 he say ? I cannot tell that any one is speaking by 
 looking at your paper. How should you have 
 shown that some one is speaking? When the pupil 
 answers that he should have used quotation marks, 
 ask, " Where should you have placed them ? " Do 
 not accept the answer, "In front of good and after 
 evening." Insist on the answer, " Around good 
 evening." Then ask, " Why ? " and require the 
 answer, " Because those are the exact words of the 
 owl (or cat). " 
 
 If a comma has been omitted, ask, and have 
 answered, these questions: What is the quotation? 
 What is the rest of the sentence ? How should the 
 quotation be separated from the rest of the sen- 
 
DICTATION TO TEACH WRITING OF QUOTATIONS 121 
 
 tence ? The answer to the last question, "By a 
 comma," is perfectly correct in this place. Do not 
 be troubled — and do not trouble your pupils — 
 with the fact that there are other ways of setting off 
 quotations ; these will be taken up and taught in due 
 time. 
 
 If a pupil has misplaced quotation marks or 
 comma, so that they inclose or separate a part of 
 the quotation or more than the quotation, go back 
 to the first questions, and ask: Is any one speak- 
 ing? What does he say? Is that all he says 
 (in case only part of the quotation has been inclosed) ? 
 Does he say all that (in case more than the quo- 
 tation has been inclosed or separated from the rest 
 of the sentence)? Just what should be inclosed in 
 quotation marks? (Answer: "The exact words 
 of the person speaking; every one of those words; 
 and not another word.") Of course, should a pupil's 
 answers to the first two questions above be correct, 
 he will have only to make his paper agree with his 
 answers, after giving reasons for the corrections to 
 be made. 
 
 The repetition, over and over again as occasion 
 requires, of all these little definite and direct ques- 
 tions, the repetition of definite and direct answers 
 to them, is not vain; it is fundamental to sure suc- 
 cess. The value of this questioning process, which 
 is entirely within the range of the child's thought, is 
 not limited to the development of correct habits of 
 
122 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 mere form in writing; it is affording the child the 
 best possible training in the analysis of thought and 
 expression. The effects of this will surely tell later 
 in his own original writing, even in grammatical 
 analysis. 
 
 Do not be troubled lest all the time required for 
 this painstaking work deprive your pupils of suffi- 
 cient "practice." Better one page written and cor- 
 rected intelligently by the child than whole reams of 
 muddled scribblings. Constant "practice" of what 
 is only half understood, and practice carried out 
 only half as well as the pupil knows how to do, and 
 " practice," ever more u practice," subjected to no 
 rigid standards which the pupil must himself apply, 
 is the fully adequate explanation of the recurrence 
 year after year, through the grammar and even the 
 high school, of the same primitive errors. 
 
 VIII (104). Finishing a Story Orally 
 
 Read with the children the beginning of the story, 
 The Helpers. See that they understand what is 
 meant by the blanks at the end. Give them a few 
 minutes to think over the answers that they will 
 give to the questions that follow the story. Then 
 work out with them the completion of the story, 
 following the general course of the questions in their 
 book, with which you should be perfectly familiar. 
 
 As called upon, or as they volunteer, let pupils 
 
FINISHING A STORY ORALLY 
 
 123 
 
 tell aloud in complete, clear-cut sentences, what the 
 robin, the oak tree, and the rose said. For example, 
 " I fill the woods with music," said the robin. 
 Demand good sense in every sentence ; the robin, 
 the oak tree, and the rose should be made to say 
 only such things as each one really does. 
 
 Have some of the children's original sentences 
 written on the board. Write some of these yourself, 
 calling upon the children to spell the words and to 
 tell you what marks of punctuation to use and where 
 to place these. Then have some of the children 
 write their sentences, while others criticize and dic- 
 tate necessary corrections. 
 
 After the children have answered orally all the 
 questions in their book, — with occasionally an 
 answer written on the board — and have thus fur- 
 nished material for the completion of the story, read 
 to them the story from the beginning and complete 
 it from the material which they have furnished. 
 You will choose, of course, from the best sentences 
 that have been given. The continuation and ending 
 of the story might be something like this: 
 
 " I fill the forest with music," said the robin. 
 
 " I let the birds build their nests in my strong branches," said 
 the oak tree. 
 
 " I fill the forest with sweetness," said the rose. 
 
 These answers pleased the angel of all wild things. 
 
 "You are all helpers," she said. 
 
 " I see that every one is trying to make his woodland home better 
 and happier." 
 
124 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Now let the children tell the story, reading the 
 first part from their books, completing the sentences 
 containing blanks, and ending the story as they 
 please. Discourage efforts to remember the sen- 
 tences and words that you gave; encourage origin- 
 ality. Have the story retold only as the retelling 
 brings out different ideas; there is no value in hav- 
 ing it repeated in just the same way until every one 
 can say it fluently. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Have pupils copy the title and the first four 
 sentences of the story, The Helpers (p. 104). These 
 papers may be preserved and used in the next lesson, 
 which calls for the completion of the story in writing. 
 
 IX (105). Finishing a Story in Writing 
 
 Before the children begin to write the ending of 
 the story, The Helpers, as they are directed to do in 
 their book, see that they read carefully the Three 
 Things to Remember. It will probably be well also 
 for you to ask them a few reminding questions about 
 capitals and the period. It is hardly possible at this 
 stage to take too many precautions for the avoidance 
 of errors. 
 
 As they write, be constantly on the alert to keep 
 them tactfully from error; merely your interested, 
 undistracted attention will prevent many careless 
 mistakes, a fitting word or question will prevent still 
 
WORDS THAT CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF SAID 125 
 
 more. Pay especial attention to the children's ef- 
 forts to write the very end of the story, telling what 
 the angel thought and what she said. Many of 
 them may need considerable help at this point. Help 
 them so that they may help themselves. 
 
 Have pupils correct their work. The correction is 
 quite as important as the writing, and the manner of 
 correction is as important as the correction itself. 
 (See p. 49.) 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 Let the children dramatize the story, The Helpers. 
 They should do this with little or no direct assist- 
 ance. Perhaps a number of children sufficient to 
 take the parts can leave the room for a moment, 
 assign the parts among themselves, return to the 
 room, and dramatize the story. 
 
 X (106). Words That Can be Used in Place of Said 
 
 This lesson, which the teacher must study with 
 the pupils, and the subsequent applications of it, is 
 destined to increase the pupil's usable vocabulary. 
 Write and keep on the board before the children, as 
 is suggested in their book, a list of words that may 
 be used in place of said. See that pupils are 
 observant, that they do report to you, as directed, 
 substitutes for this word. Call attention yourself to 
 such words in the pupils' reading, if they pass them 
 by unnoticed. Tell them that on a certain page, or 
 
126 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 in a certain paragraph, which they are reading, there 
 is a word that might be replaced by said ; let them 
 find it. 
 
 Encourage a discriminating, critical use of these 
 words. Do not let the pupils get the idea that either 
 said or any other word in the list may be used as 
 any one pleases ; but lead them to see and to feel 
 that, while one word might be used in place of sev- 
 eral others, said in place of any of the others, there 
 is one word, usually, that is better for a given place 
 than any other. This is because that word fits, 
 because it expresses definitely and fully just what 
 ought to be expressed in that place. Said can be 
 used so much, under such diverse circumstances, 
 because its meaning is so very general, because it 
 tells so little that is definite. It may be applied to 
 question, answer, statement, to any utterance of 
 actual or imaginary words ; it gives no suggestion 
 of the manner of utterance. Note the transforma- 
 tions that may be wrought in the simplest, most 
 commonplace sentence, by substituting different 
 words for said. 
 
 "Give me my hat," said the boy. 
 "Give me my hat," shouted the boy. 
 "Give me my hat," whimpered the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," laughed the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," faltered the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," grumbled the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," pleaded the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," shivered the boy. 
 
WORDS THAT Cx\N BE USED IN PLACE OF SAID 127 
 
 "Give me my hat," mocked the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," shrieked the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," commanded the boy. 
 " Give me my hat," hissed the boy. 
 
 How different the whole sentence looks, how dif- 
 ferent the mental picture and feeling aroused, as 
 one word after another is substituted for the practi- 
 cally meaningless said. 
 
 In learning to use the right word, the definite, 
 meaningful word, instead of the vague word, the 
 child is not merely enlarging his usable vocabulary, 
 he is learning to think and to express his thoughts 
 definitely. This lesson is not to be learned once for 
 all ; it is a lesson for the whole school course, for 
 life. It is not to be learned formally, by rule, precept, 
 and formula; it is to be learned gradually, here a 
 little, there a little, as occasion and experience offer 
 opportunity. 
 
 It is with this far look ahead that you should take 
 up the study of this lesson with the children, that 
 you should continue it incidentally, but none the 
 less effectively, throughout all your work with them. 
 The work with these words is typical ; it calls for 
 and develops that discriminating judgment and taste 
 which pupils must learn to exercise generally in the 
 process of becoming keen thinkers and forceful 
 speakers and writers. 
 
128 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XI (108). Questions for You 
 
 Before pupils write answers to the questions in 
 their book, get them to discuss freely what makes a 
 home beautiful — order, neatness, cleanliness, help- 
 fulness, cheerfulness, prompt obedience — and what 
 makes a schoolroom happy — industry, cheerfulness, 
 politeness, helpfulness. 
 
 XII (108). Picture Stories 
 
 (The mouse in fairyland, p. 109) 
 
 As the children have now had some experience in 
 working out picture stories, they should have devel- 
 oped considerable self-confidence and some origi- 
 nality of conception. Not to hamper them by too 
 many and too definite suggestions, the questions 
 given them on the mouse in fairyland picture are 
 but few. What they now most need is the oppor- 
 tunity to do their own thinking and to be aided, as 
 necessary, to put their thoughts and the expression 
 of their thoughts into good story form. This aid 
 must come after their original thought — must not 
 suggest the thought itself — and, hence, must be 
 given by the skillful teacher who knows how to fol- 
 low, to direct from behind. 
 
 The possibilities of the mo?ise in fairyland pic- 
 ture are almost unlimited, as any class of children 
 working on it freely will quickly demonstrate. To 
 prepare herself instantly to appreciate and tactfully 
 
PICTURE STORIES 129 
 
 to direct the utilization of the children's varied con- 
 ceptions, the teacher should make a thorough study 
 of the picture, that she may anticipate many of its 
 possibilities. 
 
 After the pupils have studied the lesson alone — 
 as long as they are evidently thinking — take it up 
 with them. Perhaps many of the following ideas 
 will develop. 
 
 In the pupils' book two possible reasons are sug- 
 gested for the mouse's coming to the fairies. Sup- 
 pose the first one, that he was afraid of something 
 at home and ran away, is accepted. 
 
 Of what was he afraid ? (The cat.) 
 
 What did the cat do? (Chased and almost caught him.) 
 
 What did the little mouse say to his mother when he got home ? 
 (" O Mother, the big gray cat almost caught me ! I'm afraid. I 
 am going to look for a land where there are no cats.") 
 
 What did the mother answer? (" There is only one such land, 
 and that is Fairyland.") 
 
 What did the little mouse do then? (He set out to look for 
 Fairyland.) 
 
 By and by he came to the river. Whom did he see swimming 
 about ? 
 
 What did he say to the duck? ("O Mr. Duck, do you know 
 where Fairyland is ? ") 
 
 What did the duck answer? The picture shows that he knew. 
 ("Yes, Fairyland is in the still pool where the water lilies grow.") 
 
 What did the little mouse then ask? ("Mr. Duck, will you 
 take me to Fairyland?") 
 
 What did the duck answer ? 
 
 What did he do? 
 
 When the mouse reached Fairyland, what did he say to the 
 
130 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 fairy queen? ("I am afraid at home, for the old gray cat is 
 always chasing me. I want to live in a land where there are no 
 cats. May I live here? ") 
 
 Could the mouse live in the still pool? Would he not drown? 
 How might the fairy change him ? (The fairy might say, " If 
 you stay here you will drown unless I change you into a fairy. 
 Would you like to be a fairy?") 
 What did the little mouse answer? 
 
 How did the queen change him into a fairy? (Touched him 
 with her wand and said, 
 
 " Little mouse, so soft and gray, 
 Be a fairy from to-day ! ") 
 Then what did the little mouse do? (He flew around singing, 
 " Now I'm happy ! Now I'm free ! 
 No old gray cat can ever catch me ! ") 
 
 Suppose the second suggestion, that the mouse 
 wanted the fairies to do something for him, is 
 taken. 
 
 What fairy gift might a little mouse like to have ? 
 
 What is the chief care of a little field mouse ? (To provide 
 food for himself and his family. Suppose that the grain in the field 
 in which he has his home has been destroyed. The little mouse 
 fears the coming winter and goes to the fairies for help. Fairy 
 Queen gives him a bag of grain — a fairy bag that will never 
 be empty.) 
 
 Or, suppose neither of the above suggestions are 
 taken. Perhaps the story will resemble the fable 
 of The Lion and the Mouse. 
 
 Why does the duck help the mouse — they are not usually 
 friends ? (Perhaps the duck was once caught in a net, or tied 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 131 
 
 to a stake, when the mouse freed it. Later when the mouse is 
 in trouble, the duck carries him to the fairies, who give him a 
 fairy gift.) 
 
 The three suggestions above were among a much 
 larger number actually made and worked out by 
 children. 
 
 At any point the children in your class may 
 branch off, as for example, at the very beginning, 
 the children may say he was afraid of traps. Again, 
 when it comes to the test, the mouse may prefer to 
 brave the cat rather than leave his mother and 
 home and become a fairy ; or the fairy queen may 
 change him into some animal that is not afraid of 
 cats. 
 
 Whatever suggestion is accepted at any point 
 in the story — and a variety of suggestions should 
 always be encouraged — you must be careful that 
 it is in harmony with the story as developed to that 
 point, and that the further development of the story 
 is in harmony with the suggestion. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Take any good suggestion made but not used 
 because not in harmony with the story as it was 
 being worked out, and work out a story in harmony 
 with the suggestion. 
 
 2. A story worked out in accordance with any 
 of the three main suggestions above is suitable for 
 dramatizing. 
 
132 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XIII (no). More Picture Stories 
 
 (The child's visit to the fairies, p. m) 
 
 The teacher should study this lesson with the 
 children from the beginning. They may not know 
 very much about fairies and elves. This picture 
 furnishes occasion to feed their natural interest and 
 curiosity — to tell them about the appearance of 
 fairies and elves; their homes; their ways of ap- 
 pearing to those they love ; their joy in good 
 children, especially kind children, and those who 
 believe in fairies and their gifts. 
 
 You should keep ever in your own mind that the 
 fairies stand for beauty and unfailing justice. The 
 help of the fairies is never given to the lazy or 
 cruel. They always reward the good, and punish, 
 or if possible reform, the bad. Fairy stories satisfy 
 the child's own demand for strict poetic justice. 
 
 The elves are the fairy workers. No better idea 
 of the elves can be given the children than that 
 found in Grimm's Fairy Tales, in the story of The 
 Shoemaker mid the Elves. This story may be told 
 to the children at this time. 
 
 Explain more fully what is told the children 
 under the questions, " What is another name for the 
 Land of Faraway ? " and " Where is the door that 
 leads to the Land of Faraway ? " found in the chil- 
 dren's book. 
 
 More is left to the imagination in this picture 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 133 
 
 than in any yet given. Of imaginative power there 
 will be no lack. Many children, however, will not 
 have had experiences which will enable them to 
 conceive adequate pictures of the scenes in Fairy- 
 land. Here the teacher must help. By showing 
 many pictures, preferably colored, and by supple- 
 menting these with vivid word pictures made up of 
 bits of childish experience, the children will be 
 enabled readily to conceive the scenes and activities 
 of Fairyland. They will see the trees of Fairyland 
 covered with gorgeous flowers and wondrous fruits ; 
 they will see birds of brilliant plumage flying about, 
 and hear their glad songs ; they will lie on the grass, 
 soft and green as moss; they will gaze up at the 
 sky, deep and blue ; they will mingle with the fairies 
 in their brilliant dresses and with wings more 
 beautiful than the wings of the finest butterfly; they 
 will delight in the hurrying elves with the silver 
 bells on their shoes and caps tinkling as they flit 
 about. 
 
 All these delights of Fairyland any child may 
 experience to the full — with your help. It will 
 take time ; more than all, it will require sympathy 
 and enthusiasm. Do you know the Faraway 
 Land ? Then you will know how, you will want 
 to introduce your children to its unending joys. 
 This is not impractical, for the more real one's 
 mental pictures of the Faraway Land, the more 
 beautiful conceptions will he form of the Near- 
 
i 3 4 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Nowaday Land, and the more earnestly will he 
 strive to make these conceptions real. 
 
 Here are some suggestions for one of the many 
 stories that the picture suggests. 
 
 A Dream of Fairyland 
 
 (Title should not be supplied until the end.) 
 
 Little (select name suggested by children) and his mothei 
 
 went into the woods one bright summer day. They sat down in 
 the shade and mother took out her sewing. 
 
 " Please tell me a story, Mother," said . " Tell me a 
 
 pretty fairy story." 
 
 So mother told the child, not one, but many beautiful fairy 
 
 tales. When she had finished, lay on the soft moss and 
 
 thought, " There may be fairies living in this very wood. Perhaps 
 some are hiding now behind that great tree just in front ot me. 
 I wonder how people go to the Faraway Land where the fairies 
 live. I wish, Oh, how I wish a fairy would come and take me to 
 Fairyland ! " 
 
 (Notice that this introduction brings into the story the chief 
 objects of interest in the picture — tree, sign, fairies.) 
 
 The woods seemed very quiet. The little birds had stopped 
 singing. There was no sound but the rustle, rustle of the leaves 
 
 in the great tree just in front of . He closed his eyes for 
 
 one little minute. Then he heard a sweet voice say, " Do you 
 really want to go to the Faraway Land?" 
 
 opened his eyes. There stood (the picture tells what). 
 
 What did see in the trunk of the great tree before him ? 
 
 (Door.) What was written above the door ? What did the fairy 
 do ? What did the child see and do in the Faraway Land ? 
 (Here the teacher must help the pupils.) 
 
 The child had a beautiful time, dancing with the fairies, play- 
 ing with the elves, eating honey and dew, and admiring all the 
 wonderful sights of Fairyland. 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 135 
 
 At last the fairy queen said, " You make such a dear little elf 
 that I think I must keep you here always. How would you like 
 to be dressed like one of these little elves and live with me 
 forever? " 
 
 (The remainder of the story will depend upon the boy's 
 answer to this question. If he says, "Yes," what will happen?) 
 
 " No, no," cried the child. " I do not want to stay here 
 always. Fairyland is lovely, but I want to go home to my 
 mother ! " At the thought of his mother, the child began to cry 
 softly, " O Mother, Mother, Mother ! " 
 
 " There, there ! " said a soft voice that sounded like the fairy 
 queen's and like mother's, too, " don't cry, my child." (If this 
 was the fairy queen speaking, what might she do to comfort the 
 child? Send for his mother to come to Fairyland? Then how 
 might the story continue and end?) " Open your eyes. You have 
 had a bad dream." 
 
 The child opened his eyes. He was resting on the soft moss, 
 and mother was bending over him. 
 
 " No," he said, as he looked at the big tree just in front of 
 him, " no, it was not a bad dream. It was the most beautiful 
 dream I ever had. But I am glad it was only a dream." Then 
 
 slipped his little hand into mother's and told her the story 
 
 of his visit to the Land of Faraway. 
 
 The above outline is offered merely as a type. 
 It is not intended to impose it upon the teacher, 
 nor must she impose this or any other outline which 
 she may make upon the children. If a story is ever 
 worked out with the children to fit an outline which 
 the teacher already has in mind, this should not be 
 done at a sacrifice of the pupils' own original con- 
 ceptions. The ideas, just as far as possible, should 
 always come from the children. The chief function 
 
136 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 of the teacher is to follow the children in their con- 
 ceptions and to help them to build their conceptions 
 into a harmonious and complete story. The chil- 
 dren are to furnish the content, the teacher is to 
 help them give it form. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Let the little boy tell his story. 
 
 2. Let the fairy queen tell her story. 
 
 3. One or more of the stories may be dramatized. 
 
 XIV (113). Studying a Poem 
 
 Read to the children, with appropriate expression, 
 The Chestnut Bur, Study the lesson with them in 
 their book. In having parts of the poem read, as 
 directed, work for free, dramatic expression. This 
 is to be secured, not by demanding it, but by mak- 
 ing the children feel free, by getting them " into the 
 spirit" of the poem, by making them enjoy it, by 
 making them want to express the different parts of 
 it just as they think these should be expressed. 
 Such freedom, enjoyment, and desire for discrimi- 
 nating expression is contagious; let the teacher 
 furnish the source of it. 
 
 After this detailed study, have as many children 
 read the poem as time allows, remembering that the 
 purpose of every child must be to give a thoughtful, 
 discriminating rendering, to express his conceptions 
 as effectively as he can. 
 
MEMORIZING A POEM 137 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 i. Let the children dramatize the story in the 
 poem. They should be able to do this with little 
 or no direct assistance. It will help them to recall 
 the movements of the wind and the sunshine fairies 
 as they dramatized them in the story, The Little 
 White Flower (p. 91). 
 
 2. Children may tell the complete story from 
 the poem. This should not be too difficult, after 
 the detailed study and dramatization ; the events 
 are simple and given in natural order, which the 
 child should follow. Be not satisfied with a dry 
 and colorless statement of the facts; that is no 
 worthy reproduction at all. There must be life, 
 animation, conversation, concrete detail, even to the 
 introduction of many original touches not inconsist- 
 ent with the main facts. 
 
 XV (116). Memorizing a Poem 
 
 The poem, The Chestnut Bur, is worthy of mem- 
 orizing, not only on account of its appeal to the 
 child's fancy, but because of the simple, natural 
 order in which it tells the story, an order which will 
 serve as a model for the original story work which 
 the pupils will soon be doing. 
 
 See that the pupils understand and follow the 
 directions given in their book for memorizing the 
 poem. After they have studied it in this way for 
 
138 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 eight or ten minutes, test them. Probably some 
 will be able to recite all three stanzas while others 
 will scarcely have mastered the first. Commend 
 the efforts of every one who has tried faithfully, and 
 next time the results will be better; censure honest 
 effort, and next time the results, if not the effort, 
 will probably be less satisfactory. 
 
 Do not permit any mere word repetition of the 
 poem. The pupil who cannot say it with appropri- 
 ate expression has not really learned it. 
 
 Keep this, and all other poems that are memo-' 
 rized, fresh by occasional review. 
 
CHAPTER SIX 
 
 On account of the relation of this chapter to 
 the preceding work it is especially suited either to 
 the conclusion of the third or to the beginning of the 
 fourth year's work ; or, better still, it may serve both 
 as the concluding chapter of the third and the be- 
 ginning chapter of the fourth year of language 
 study. 
 
 The chapter takes up nothing distinctly new — 
 unless the writing of conversation in dialogue form 
 be so considered. Study the work given and com- 
 pare it with that covered in the preceding chapters, 
 and you will find that everything taken up pre- 
 viously — all kinds of exercises and all marks and 
 forms — is here reviewed thoroughly and the power 
 and acquisitions of the individual pupil well tested. 
 Yet this is by no means a review chapter in the con- 
 ventional meaning of that term. The reviews and 
 tests are accomplished — and most effectively — not 
 through repetition of exercises already given, but 
 through new and varied material and exercises 
 which will interest the children and elicit their best 
 efforts not less than the work of any preceding 
 chapter. 
 
 139 
 
i 4 o TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Whenever this chapter is completed, whether 
 at the end of the third or at the beginning of the 
 fourth year, or at both these periods, compare the 
 work from the beginning of the book and the pur- 
 poses of it with the actual accomplishment of the 
 children. If these questions can be answered in 
 the affirmative, the study thus far has been a 
 success. 
 
 1. Have the children assimilated the ideas and the 
 spirit of the stories — the fables and myths — made them 
 an integral and usable part of their mental assets ? 
 
 2. Have they developed a considerable degree of con- 
 trol over their mental stores and mental powers so that 
 they can reproduce and invent stories with some touch of 
 originality and express them orally with effect ? 
 
 3. Are they beginning to acquire the power of express- 
 ing their thought — reproduced and original — in writing ? 
 
 4. Have they acquired some facility — through dramatiz- 
 ing, dialogue, impersonation, and conversation — in throw- 
 ing themselves appreciatively into the position of different 
 characters ? 
 
 5. Are they acquiring freedom, naturalness, spontaneity, 
 and individuality of thought, feeling, and expression ? 
 
 6. Do they know and understand how, when, and why 
 to use, and are they forming the habit of using correctly 
 the forms and words that have been especially taught ? 
 
 (a) The capital to begin the first word of a sentence ; 
 to begin the first and principal words of a 
 title ; to begin proper names ; to begin every 
 line Of poetry ; to begin quotations. 
 
FURTHER STUDY OF QUOTATIONS 141 
 
 (b) The period at the end of a statement. 
 
 (c) The question mark. 
 
 (d) Quotation marks. 
 
 (e) Their, there ; to, too, two. 
 
 Apply these questions not merely to your class as 
 a whole, but to every individual in it. If they can 
 be answered affirmatively for every individual, you 
 need not worry about the class ; if any question 
 must be answered negatively for any child, it does 
 not help that child that the same question can be 
 answered affirmatively for all the other children. 
 Try to locate and to correct individual weaknesses. 
 
 I (117). Further Study of Quotations; Capital I 
 
 Study with the children the lesson in their book ; 
 supplement the questions there given by such others 
 as may be necessary. In every sentence have the 
 pupil tell the quotation, the rest of the sentence, 
 and how these parts of the sentence are separated, 
 like this : 
 
 She said, " Who will plant this wheat ? " 
 The quotation is, Who will plant this wheat? 
 The rest of the sentence is, she said. 
 
 The quotation is separated from the rest of the sentence by a 
 comma. 
 
 To avoid confusing the child, no suggestion is 
 made in the pupils' book of exceptions to the rule, 
 " The first word of a quotation begins with a capital 
 letter." Care has been taken throughout the book 
 
142 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 to introduce no exception to this in matter given for 
 the pupils' study. Should a pupil call attention to 
 a quotation, the first word of which does not begin 
 with a capital, such as may be found in the pupils' 
 book, pages 140, 157, and elsewhere, it may be ex- 
 plained briefly that single words, or a few words 
 that would not make a complete sentence if they 
 stood alone, are begun with small letters when 
 quoted. No other exception to the general rule is 
 likely to be met or noted by the pupils. As they 
 advance in their language 'study, and with the gen- 
 eral rule fixed, they will easily grasp and apply the 
 exception. 
 
 II (120). Copying to Learn the Writing of Quotations 
 and the Capital I 
 
 Do everything possible to encourage accuracy 
 and neatness in the pupils' work. Try to make 
 sure that pupils do think to themselves the reasons 
 for the use of marks of punctuation, quotation marks, 
 and capitals, as they make them. Help pupils to 
 avoid mistakes. Have the mistakes that are made 
 — in spite of your efforts and the efforts of the pu- 
 pils — corrected at once by the pupil after giving 
 the reasons for the correct form. In the correcting 
 follow carefully the directions given in Chapter Five 
 (p. 116). 
 
 Save the pupils' papers. Add to them the papers 
 written on the remaining parts of the story, as these 
 
PUPILS' STUDY IN PREPARATION FOR DICTATION 143 
 
 are studied. When the story has been completed, 
 each pupils papers may be bound into a little book- 
 let, for which the pupil may make and decorate a 
 suitable cover. 
 
 Ill (121). Pupils' Study in Preparation for Dictation 
 
 While the pupils are studying this lesson, go from 
 one to another — especially among the poorer pu- 
 pils — to see that every one is really studying intelli- 
 gently. You must know what each one's weaknesses 
 are and what difficulties he is likely to have. Per- 
 haps one is not telling himself the reason for the 
 use of the capital to begin the word Who, second 
 sentence, because he has forgotten. By questions 
 and suggestions help him to remember that the book 
 has told him already the reason for this, and help 
 him to turn back in his book until he finds it (p. 118). 
 Similarly, help other pupils to find out from some 
 previous lesson why / is a capital, why the comma 
 is used, and why the question mark is inside the 
 quotation marks. 
 
 In all of this, do as little for the pupil as possible, 
 get him to do all he can for himself. Of course it 
 is much easier — and it takes far less time — to tell 
 the pupil at once what he seems to need, to call upon 
 some other pupil to tell him, or to refer him to the 
 exact place in his book where the desired information 
 is given ; but this is not training the pupil to help 
 
144 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 himself, to rely upon himself, to command and to 
 use what he has learned and the book in which he 
 has learned it — it is doing just the reverse, en- 
 couraging dependence on others. You will often 
 find that a pupil really does know what he seems 
 not to know, what he thinks himself he does not 
 know; you will find also that many, perhaps most 
 pupils, are not using their books, but merely reading 
 in them what they are specially told to read. Now 
 here are two of the most important lessons that any 
 pupil can learn in school, two of the most valuable 
 habits that any one can acquire, the habit of using 
 what one has learned and the habit of using books ; 
 these habits are of vastly more moment than the 
 knowledge of any number of mere facts, rules, or 
 principles of language or of any other subject. The 
 process of teaching and learning language and every 
 other subject must be such as to insure the estab- 
 lishment and development of these habits. Fortu- 
 nately, the process of teaching and learning that 
 will accomplish this is, in the long run, the most 
 effective that can be employed, considered merely 
 from the standpoint of the mastery of any given 
 subject. 
 
 After the pupils have studied by themselves for 
 ten or twelve minutes, you may take up the last two 
 or three sentences for class study aloud. 
 
TESTING AND TEACHING THROUGH DICTATION 145 
 
 IV (122). Testing and Teaching through Dictation 
 
 A dictation exercise that has any value is given, 
 not because dictation is a good way to teach language, 
 but because that particular exercise, rightly used, is 
 suitable for the teaching of certain definite things. 
 That a dictation exercise may be effective, the 
 teacher must have clearly in mind the specific things 
 which may be taught through that exercise ; then 
 she must conduct the exercise in a way to teach 
 those specific things. Part Two of The Little Red 
 Hen, which is to be dictated at this time, may be 
 made to test and teach almost every conventional 
 written form that pupils have thus far studied : 
 
 Capitals 
 
 "to begin the first and principal words of a title, 
 to begin the first word of a sentence, 
 to begin the first word of a quotation. 
 % for the word /. 
 A period at the end of a sentence that is a statement. 
 A question mark at the end of a sentence that asks a question. 
 A comma to separate a quotation from the rest of the sentence. 
 Quotation marks to inclose a quotation. 
 
 For the purpose of anticipating mistakes, it will 
 be well to question pupils on these matters just be- 
 fore beginning the dictation. Dictate full sentences, 
 even though the sentence, like the second, may 
 seem long. Better repeat, and have pupils repeat 
 after you, two or three times, than to break the 
 sentence in the dictation. For further suggestions 
 regarding dictation, see page 50. It should hardly 
 
146 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 be necessary here, as there advised, to question on 
 each sentence in detail before it is written. Such 
 questioning on the first sentence containing a quota- 
 tion should suffice. 
 
 In correcting, follow carefully the directions given 
 in the exercise to which reference has just been 
 made (p. 117). It is highly desirable to have the 
 correction follow immediately the dictation. But if 
 the time is too short for both the dictation and the 
 correcting, take another period for the latter. The 
 careful correcting of an exercise like this should 
 never be omitted or slighted. Without correcting, 
 the exercise has not served its purpose ; it has not 
 taught, and it has tested in vain. Worse still, it has 
 probably permitted the making of errors, uncon- 
 sciously or in good faith, adding strength to the 
 tendency to make the same errors again, and it has 
 undoubtedly fostered in many pupils a feeling of in- 
 difference to correct forms. Better not give such 
 an exercise than to stop with the dictation. 
 
 V (122). Unstudied Dictation 
 
 With only such study as you think necessary on 
 the spelling of difficult words, such as brought, flour* 
 and bread, which may be written on the board and 
 spelled orally, dictate the following, which is Part 
 Three of The Little Red Hen. Note that the last 
 four of the six sentences are exactly the same as the 
 corresponding four in Parts One and Two. 
 
SUMMARY OF THE USES OF CAPITALS 147 
 
 The Little Red Hen 
 
 The little red hen brought the flour home. 
 
 Then she said, " Who will make this flour into bread? " 
 
 The rat said, "Not I." 
 
 The cat said, " Not I." 
 
 The pig said, "Not I." 
 
 " I will," said the little red hen, and she did. 
 
 In dictating and correcting, follow the directions 
 given in the last and in previous lessons. 
 
 VI (123). A Written Reproduction 
 
 In this lesson, which children are to study and 
 prepare by themselves, do not try to keep them 
 together in their work ; let each child begin to write 
 as soon as he is ready. Insist that each one corrects 
 his work, as directed, before he brings it to you for 
 criticism. In the correction with you, when you 
 note a mistake, do not tell the pupil outright what 
 the mistake is; with as little help as possible, let 
 him find out what it is and tell what the correction 
 should be and why. 
 
 There is one, and only one, new point in this les- 
 son, the use of the comma to separate no from the 
 rest of the sentence. It is unnecessary to give any 
 explanation of this, at this time, further than the 
 statement that is given in the pupils' book. 
 
 VII (124). Summary of the Uses of Capitals 
 
 Note that the word paragraph is used several 
 times. Attempt no definition of this term, simply 
 
148 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 use it and thus let pupils become familiar with the 
 word and at least the appearance of the thing indi- 
 cated. They can learn to use paragraphs, just as 
 they have learned to use words and sentences, with- 
 out being able to give or really to understand a defi- 
 nition of any of these terms. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Taking as a basis any story, or part of a story, that 
 has already been used in the pupils' book, question, 
 as in this lesson, regarding the use of capitals. 
 
 VIII (126). A Written Exercise on the Use of Capitals 
 
 Your criticism and the pupils' correction of their 
 work may begin as soon as the pupils begin to write. 
 Go about from desk to desk. You will know what 
 pupils need special help and encouragement in get- 
 ting started. 
 
 Of course the pupils' work must be correct in 
 form as well as in reasons given for the use of the 
 several capitals. 
 
 IX (127). Reading 
 
 Read the story to the children, then have them 
 read it, first in narrative form, then in dialogue form, 
 as was done in the case of the story, Mabel and the 
 Fairy Folk (p. 52). Carry out here the suggestions 
 given in that lesson for the reading and the critical 
 discussion of the reading. 
 
WRITING A CONVERSATION IN DIALOGUE FORM 149 
 
 X (130). Studying the Story, "The Star Visitor" 
 
 This is a lesson for the pupils to study from their 
 books. As the questions in their book indicate, the 
 study of it will prepare them to dramatize it. To 
 make their study thoroughly successful, you should 
 supervise their work carefully, to insure that every 
 one, particularly the poorer ones, and those who have 
 not fully learned to concentrate their attention, are 
 really working intelligently and faithfully. Near the 
 close of their study period some of the more difficult 
 questions should be taken up for oral answer and dis- 
 cussion. 
 
 XI (i<£2). Dramatizing the Story, "The Star Visitor" 
 
 Every exercise in dramatizing should put upon 
 the children a little more responsibility than they 
 have had in the past, should offer them more oppor- 
 tunity for initiative and originality. Their experi- 
 ence thus far and their thorough study of the story 
 should enable them with slight help from the 
 teacher and without hesitation to arrange and assign 
 the parts, to locate the different scenes, and to carry 
 out the play. 
 
 See full directions and suggestions for dramatiz- 
 ing (pp. 14, 38, 69). 
 
 XII (132). Writing a Conversation in Dialogue Form 
 
 See that pupils understand what is required of 
 them. Supervise their work to see that they are 
 
150 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 applying correctly not only what they are told in 
 this lesson, but all that they have learned about the 
 use of capitals and the period. Let them copy the 
 colon after the names of the speakers, the cat and 
 the owl, without explanation. 
 
 When they have finished writing have two chil- 
 dren stand and read from their papers, one taking 
 the part of the cat r the other of the owl. In this 
 reading,, of course, they should omit the words, cat 
 and owl. 
 
 XIII (133). Picture Stories 
 
 (Child in the snow, p. 134) 
 
 This picture tells its story so vividly th^t the 
 children need little help from the teacher \\\ getting 
 the main facts ; to realize its possibilities :>f endless 
 variety in detail, however, requires the teacher's 
 skillful guidance.. 
 
 The questions in the children's book concerning 
 the time that the little girl went out and the reason 
 for her leaving home should call forth a variety of 
 introductions. Here are some that have been given 
 by children: 
 
 1. She went out in the afternoon to visit her grandmother or a 
 playmate, (a) She forgot and stayed too late. (/>) She left in 
 time but stopped to visit a little friend, (r) She stopped to play 
 in the snow. (//) She stopped to coast with some other children. 
 (e) She left in plenty of time, but it began to snow, the wind 
 blew, and it suddenly began to grow dark, so she lost the path. 
 (/) She left in plenty of time, but instead of keeping to the road, 
 
PICTURE STORIES 151 
 
 she thought she would save time by cutting through the fields. 
 The snow had covered all the paths ; as it grew dark, she lost her 
 way. 
 
 2. She went out after dark to look for her kitty and got lost. 
 
 3. She is a poor little child who has no home and no parents. 
 She was wandering from door to door begging until, almost 
 frozen, she sank to the ground. 
 
 4. She was cross because her mother would not let her do 
 something that she wanted to do, so she ran away and got lost. 
 
 Many answers may be given to the question ask- 
 ing how long the dog has been with the child. Of 
 course the answer to this question and the intro- 
 duction that is selected for the story must be in har- 
 mony. Either the answer to this question must fit 
 the introduction, or the latter must be made to fit 
 the answer; perhaps it will seem best to modify each 
 somewhat. 
 
 Whatever the beginning and the main part, the 
 story may have several different endings. A satis- 
 factory ending should see the child taken to a place 
 of comfort, her own home or elsewhere, tenderly 
 cared for, and fully restored. 
 
 See that the dog is given his full share of credit. 
 
 Do not be satisfied with one good title. Perhaps 
 the children will give you some of the following: 
 Saved ! Brave Rover, A Dog Hero, The Lost Child, 
 Lost in the Drifts, Found! 
 
 The title may be sought before the story is begun or 
 after it is ended. A title chosen at the outset will 
 often help to give form and direction to the story. 
 
152 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Let children try to tell the story from the stand- 
 point of the little girl. To do this they must be- 
 come the little girl, go through her experiences and 
 weave these into a connected story to be told in the 
 first person. 
 
 This exercise requires a change of attitude similar 
 to that required in the dramatizing of a story. Like 
 dramatizing it gives increased vividness to the 
 pupil's conceptions, feelings, and expressions. Dif- 
 ferent titles from those already used will be called 
 for. Perhaps some like these will be found suitable : 
 
 How I Went to Bed in the Snow 
 
 When I Ran Away 
 
 My Best Friend 
 
 My Dream in the Snow » 
 
 XIV (135.) More Picture Stories 
 (Children in the woods, p. 137) 
 
 Study the lesson orally with the children. See 
 that the latter part of the lesson has the effect in- 
 tended, that it helps to show the children the folly 
 of being afraid of imaginary things. Try to have 
 them show their appreciation of this in the way 
 they tell this part of the story. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 i. The lesson of the folly of baseless fears may 
 be reenforced by having stories told that may be 
 suggested by these questions : 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 153 
 
 Were you ever afraid of anything you saw at night that you 
 would hardly notice in the daytime, such as hanging clothing, a 
 shadow, a bush, an old stump, a stone, a noise? 
 
 What did you do to cure yourself of your fright? 
 
 What might you have done? (Walked straight up to it and 
 touched it.) 
 
 This is the lesson to be driven home. Fear is in- 
 side; nothing outside can harm. Examine the thing 
 that causes fear; touch it, and the fear will vanish. 
 
 2. Have pupils write the first paragraph of the 
 story, telling how the children came to be alone 
 in the woods at night and about their fright. Be- 
 fore allowing them to write, work over the oral 
 telling of the paragraph with them until each child 
 knows just exactly what he is going to write, then he 
 will not have to think of what he is to write so in- 
 tensely that he will forget how to spell and punctuate. 
 The better his oral form, the fewer mistakes in the 
 written work to be corrected by pupil and teacher. 
 It may help the children to put definite questions on 
 the board before them, the answers to which, given 
 in complete sentences, will make a connected whole. 
 Such questions as these will serve : 
 
 Where did three children go one day ?. 
 How did they happen to be out after dark ? 
 On their way home what lonely place did they have to pass 
 through ? 
 
 How did the trees look? 
 
 How did the children feel about it? 
 
 What did they do? 
 
154 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The answers given first orally and then in writing 
 might be as follows : 
 
 (a) One day three little children went to a party. They stayed 
 so late that it was dark when they started for home. As they 
 went home they had to pass through a wood. The trees looked 
 like giants. The children were frightened. They ran home as 
 fast as they could go. 
 
 Or the answers might be more like this: 
 
 {b) Three little children were out playing one day. They 
 were having such a good time that they played until it was dark. 
 On the way home they passed through a wood. The trees looked 
 like monsters with great eyes and long arms and legs. The. 
 children were frightened. They took hold of hands and ran 
 home. 
 
 The first and second questions are the ones that 
 offer most chance for variety. Take these questions 
 separately, having several children in turn answer 
 each question in a complete sentence. Thoughts 
 like the following may be brought forth : 
 
 The children loitered on their way from school (why ?) ; they 
 were told never to go into the woods (why?) ; they disobeyed 
 (why?) and were lost ; they started to run away from home 
 (why?), were frightened by the trees, and turned and ran home; 
 they came into the woods to get a Christmas tree, stayed too late, 
 thought the trees were trying to punish them for cutting down 
 their little brother ; they had been chasing the squirrels from their 
 nests in the trees or stealing the squirrels' winter store of nuts and 
 thought the trees were angry. 
 
 When pupils have answered all questions in order, 
 to insure connected thought, let them write. 
 
TELLING THE STORY FROM THE POEM 155 
 
 3. Have children write as many titles for this 
 story as they can, either writing in turn on the 
 blackboard or on individual papers for seat work. 
 
 4. Encourage the best pupils to write the whole 
 story. If only one child writes the complete story 
 have him carefully correct and copy it. Put his 
 story away in some book or portfolio as the begin- 
 ning of a collection of picture stories. Other chil- 
 dren will be anxious to add to the collection. 
 
 XV (138). Studying a Poem 
 
 Read the poem, One, Two, Three, to and with 
 the children. Let it be so read that every one will 
 get fully into the spirit of it. Apply here the sug- 
 gestions already given for effective reading, for the 
 discussion and improvement of reading (pp. 8, 36). 
 
 XVI (141). Telling the Story from the Poem 
 
 After the children have studied the poem as di- 
 rected, call upon several to tell the story of grandma 
 and the little boy who was half past three. En- 
 courage originality and individuality in the telling. 
 
 XVII (141). Playing "One, Two, Three" 
 
 Let the children choose one child to " hide." 
 The child chosen may think a moment of the place 
 where he will hide. He should think of some 
 place in the vicinity — in the schoolroom, the build- 
 ing, or the yard. If found desirable, the hiding 
 
156 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 place may be limited to the room, or the building. 
 When the one hiding has chosen his hiding place, 
 he calls, " Ready ! " Then the other children guess, 
 under whatever restrictions may be imposed re- 
 garding " turns," where he is hiding. 
 
 In guessing, the children must ask good ques- 
 tions, such as this, "Are you in the cloakroom?" 
 and the one hiding must give full answers, like this, 
 " No, I am not in the cloakroom." 
 
 The one who is hiding may give a little help, as 
 grandma did, by saying, " You are cold," if the 
 place guessed is not near the place in which the 
 child plays he is hiding, or, " You are warm," if 
 the place guessed is near the chosen place. 
 
 The one who guesses the hiding place takes his 
 turn at hiding while the others "hunt " for him. 
 
 There is no fun and little value in the game 
 when it is allowed to drag. Every one must be 
 alert, — think, guess, reply quickly. 
 
 Playing this game has the same effect as drama- 
 tizing. It helps the children to get fully into the 
 spirit of the poem and to appreciate such expressions 
 as, " In guesses One, Two, Three," " You are in the 
 china closet," " But he still had Two and Three," 
 " You are warm and warmer," " And he found her 
 with his Three." Following the play let the children 
 read the poem again ; they will show that they are 
 now playing with Grandma and the wee lad. 
 
CHAPTER SEVEN 
 
 Chapter Six was a transition chapter. It served 
 to test and review — not by formal repetition, but 
 through use — the results of the work of the preced- 
 ing chapters. Even though that chapter may have 
 been completed at the end of the third year, the work 
 of the fourth year should begin with it. 
 
 In preparation for the work of this chapter, you 
 should familiarize yourself thoroughly with all the 
 work of the preceding chapters so that you will 
 know not merely the specific things that have been 
 taught, but so that you may at the outset get fully 
 into the spirit and purpose of the work. At the 
 opening of each previous chapter you will find a 
 summary statement of what the chapter contains ; 
 but it is not enough to read these summaries. The 
 work of every chapter, as explained in this Manual 
 and as presented in the pupils' book, should be 
 studied until mastered. Only thus can you prepare 
 yourself to direct successfully the continuation of 
 your pupils' work as they take up Chapter Seven. 
 This chapter, also, you should study through care- 
 fully in the light of the previous chapters, before 
 beginning the work with the children. 
 
 You will observe that all the main ideas, all the 
 
 157 
 
158 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 principal kinds of work, all the conventional forms, 
 presented in the first six chapters, are continued in 
 this chapter. The work of this and of subsequent 
 chapters, which keep in constant review through 
 use in ever changing ways all the essentials pre- 
 sented from the beginning, should be made to 
 correct any of the weaknesses of previous work, 
 however these may have arisen. 
 
 This plan of advance must not suggest the forget- 
 ting either by pupils or teacher of the work of the 
 past, even of the precise form and content of much 
 of it. On the contrary, past work should always be 
 kept fresh by reference and comparison ; it furnishes 
 types which are of inestimable value in facilitating 
 the appreciation and mastery of future work. This 
 suggests another and important reason for the inti- 
 mate familiarity of the teacher with all the pupils' 
 previous work. 
 
 In addition to the continuation of all kinds of 
 work previously taken up, this chapter contains the 
 following new work : 
 
 1. The names of the days of the week ; their origin and 
 meaning. Practice in writing them in full and abbreviated. 
 
 2. The use of the period in writing abbreviations. 
 
 3. Possessives and the use of the apostrophe. 
 
 4. Writing a story from different standpoints, those of 
 different actors or observers. 
 
 6. The beginnings of written picture stories. 
 
STUDYING A STORY 159 
 
 I (142). Studying a Story; Quotations Reviewed; 
 Capitals to Begin Days of the Week 
 
 Read the story through with the children. Ask 
 them to read by paragraphs. Just say, " Read the 
 first paragraph, the second paragraph, etc." Ask 
 such questions and give such directions as these : 
 How many paragraphs in this story? What is 
 the first word of the first paragraph ? Of the sec- 
 ond paragraph? Read the first sentence of the 
 second paragraph. Read the last sentence of the 
 first paragraph. Read the third sentence of the last 
 paragraph. 
 
 Use the word paragraph freely in talking about 
 the story and in studying it. This is for the purpose 
 of familiarizing the children with the use of the term 
 and making them observant of the division of stories 
 into paragraphs. Attempt no definition or formal 
 description of a paragraph (see p. 47). 
 
 See how many children will note the words Sun- 
 day and Monday beginning with capitals and recog- 
 nize that they offer something new. Their atten- 
 tion may be directed to them by such questions as 
 these: What words begin with capitals in the first, 
 sentence of the first paragraph ? Why ? What words 
 begin with capitals in the third sentence of the third 
 paragraph? Why? Let children study aloud the 
 use of capitals to begin these words, using the form 
 given in their book. 
 
 Have pupils study independently the questions on 
 
160 TEACHER'S MANUAL * 
 
 the lesson, but hold yourself in readiness to answer 
 any question or to direct the work of any child that 
 may be having difficulty. See that every pupil 
 is really studying actively and understandingly. Be 
 quick to detect the concealment of inactivity and 
 nonexertion by the mere semblance of attention. 
 Do not allow children to form this lazy, sleepy habit; 
 arouse them. 
 
 In studying the quotations of this story say noth- 
 ing about the break in a quotation, such as occurs 
 in paragraphs two and three; just teach and insist 
 that pupils learn and say that all the exact words of 
 a speaker — all and not one more — must have 
 quotation marks around them. 
 
 The quotation of paragraph two should be studied 
 as follows: 
 
 There are quotation marks around Go away, because these are 
 the exact words of the sun. 
 
 There is a comma to separate the quotation from the rest of the 
 sentence. 
 
 There is a period after the sentence, because it is a statement. 
 
 There are quotation marks around Do you not know that this is 
 my day ? You have done wrong on my day. So you cannot enter 
 here. Go to the moon, because these are the exact words of the 
 sun. 
 
 Always have pupils, when giving a quotation, read 
 every word of the quotation — and not a word more. 
 This will train them to distinguish sharply the quota- 
 tion from the other words of sentences. 
 
THE DAYS OF THE WEEK 161 
 
 II (144). Dictation, Studied and Unstudied 
 
 Without reviewing the questions on the last lesson 
 or having pupils study it in any way, dictate the 
 story as given below. The pupils should be acquir- 
 ing power; this exercise will test them. As you 
 will observe, the condensation of the story brings in 
 some new sentences (unstudied dictation), while 
 several are like the original (studied dictation). In 
 dictation that has not been thoroughly studied, tell 
 pupils when to begin a paragraph by saying, " Par- 
 agraph." 
 
 The Man in the Moon 
 
 A man was lifted to the sky for working on Sunday. He tried 
 to enter the sun. 
 
 " Go away," said the sun. " You have done wrong on my 
 day. I will not have you here. Go to the moon." 
 
 The man entered the moon. There he stands until this very 
 day. 
 
 The story, as here abridged, is so short that it 
 should be dictated and corrected in a single exercise. 
 Observe directions already given for correcting 
 
 (p. 48). 
 
 Ill (144)- The Days of the Week ; Origin of the 
 Names ; Abbreviations ; Use of Capitals 
 
 Study this lesson with the children, giving as 
 little direct help as possible, but making sure that 
 every one studies actively and intelligently as the 
 pupils' book directs. Look over with each child, 
 
162 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 as he hands it to you, his written list of the names 
 and abbreviations of the days of the week, so as to 
 direct his attention to any errors that may have 
 escaped him, and to secure his intelligent correction 
 of these. 
 
 IV (146). Original Exercise Involving the Writing of 
 the Days of the Week in Pull and Abbreviated 
 
 Read over the lesson with the children. To pre- 
 pare them for writing, as they are directed, have 
 them tell interesting things that they did or that 
 happened each day. Get them to make good, short, 
 complete statements. Insist on things of real in- 
 terest. Suggest that they tell of things that their 
 father or mother, brother or sister, or a friend, if 
 absent, would like to know, — things that the absent 
 one would like to have written to him in a letter; 
 or that they tell things that they would like to do 
 again, or that they would like to have happen again. 
 
 If the entire exercise — the oral preparation, the 
 writing and correcting — is likely to be too long for 
 a single lesson period, take the full time of one 
 period for the oral work and leave the written exer- 
 cise with its correction for a second period. Have 
 each pupil correct his own work under your direction. 
 The correcting may begin as soon as the first sen- 
 tences are written, the teacher passing about among 
 the desks. 
 
 Do not tell a pupil what his mistake is, or what 
 
A STORY FROM A RHYME 163 
 
 the correct form is ; give him just enough suggestion 
 so that he can find out for himself. If he has made 
 a mistake in writing a day, such as forgetting the 
 initial capital, or the period after the abbreviation, 
 or misspelling, direct his attention to the word; if 
 he fails to discover his mistake at once, let him look 
 up the correct form in one of the type exercises in 
 his book. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Pupils may repeat the written exercise of the 
 lesson, each one choosing the form which he did 
 not choose in the regular exercise. 
 
 2. Let pupils copy or write from dictation the 
 following rhyme : 
 
 The Seven Days 
 
 Monday says, " I wash the clothes." 
 Tuesday says, " I iron them." 
 Wednesday says, " I bake the cakes." 
 Thursday says, " I eat them." 
 Friday says, " I am sweeping day." 
 Saturday says, " The children love me." 
 Sunday says, " I am the Sabbath day. 
 There is no day above me." 
 
 V (147). A Story from a Rhyme; the Apostrophe to 
 Denote Possession 
 
 Read the story with the children. Let them 
 study it aloud with you, so that you may see that 
 they study it as directed in their book. Have them 
 
1 64 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 study the quotations according to the form already 
 given them. (Pupil's book, page 118. See also 
 Manual, page 141.) 
 
 The subject of possessives will be taken up more 
 fully in Section VII. What is said here about 
 clock 's will serve as a slight foretaste. The state- 
 ment of the use of the apostrophe and the letter s, 
 as formally given in the pupils' book (p. 152), should 
 be carefully read at this time ; the memorizing of it 
 may be deferred until Section VII. 
 
 After the story has been studied as directed, have 
 it told orally by several children. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Have pupils copy or write from dictation the 
 story, The Mouse and the Clock. 
 
 2. Let pupils study the rhyme and then write it 
 from memory. 
 
 Before a pupil begins either exercise he should 
 have a definite purpose — the writing of the rhyme 
 or story correctly in all details, the use of capitals, 
 punctuation and quotation marks, and spelling. It 
 is not enough to assume that pupils know why they 
 are required to do exercises like these. With this 
 assumption on the part of the teacher, pupils will 
 soon be doing what they are directed to do with no 
 clearer or higher purpose than that of doing as they 
 are told, which is the pupils* counterpart of the 
 teacher's perfunctory assignment of exercises to fill, 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 165 
 
 or "kill" time. Exercises which grow out of these 
 vague, purposeless motives on the part of teacher 
 and pupils only serve to develop and confirm all 
 sorts of errors ; their correction is only a further 
 waste of time. 
 
 In every least exercise, whether regular or sup- 
 plementary, have a definite, worthy purpose in giv- 
 ing that exercise, and make sure that your pupils 
 know that purpose at the outset and that they keep 
 it constantly and clearly before them throughout 
 the exercise. When the exercise is completed it 
 must be corrected by the pupil — with such sugges- 
 tion and direction as may be necessary from the 
 teacher — always under the guidance of the purpose 
 with which it was written. Has that purpose been 
 realized ? 
 
 There is here a bit of simple but profoundly im- 
 portant pedagogy. Keen interest may be given to 
 the dullest exercise by making of it a direct chal- 
 lenge to the power of the pupil. Here is something 
 for you to do ; these are the conditions. Can you 
 do it? Now that you have tried it, let us see 
 whether you have succeeded. In the instinctive 
 response to a definite challenge lies the secret of 
 much of the zest with which many games, puzzles, 
 and physical exercises are pursued. Challenge your 
 pupil effectively and he concentrates all his powers 
 on the task you put before him — and he perseveres 
 until he comes off victor. 
 
1 66 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 VI (i5°)« Reproducing' a Story from Different 
 Standpoints 
 
 This exercise consists in telling the story of the 
 mouse and the clock — the subject of the last ex- 
 ercise — from the standpoint of several different 
 observers or participants, as the little mouse, the 
 big mouse, the clock, or any article of furniture in 
 the hall that may be supposed to have witnessed 
 the events of the story. The exercise thus goes a 
 step beyond mere reproduction ; it calls for imagina- 
 tion and some originality of conception on the part 
 of the pupil. This exercise will reveal the pupils 
 customary thought processes in reproducing a story. 
 The pupil whose chief reliance is on memory of 
 words will find this exercise very difficult, if he 
 does not make complete failure of it. The pupil, 
 on the other hand, who is in the habit of grasping 
 and vividly imagining for himself the scenes and 
 events of the story, and of relating these in words 
 of his own, will find this exercise easy and highly 
 interesting. For pupils of both types the exercise, 
 rightly used, will prove most effective in giving a 
 ready and easy command of thoughts and mental 
 imagery, in accustoming pupils to feel and to see 
 their own thoughts and mental pictures clearly, to 
 hold these before their minds at will, to turn 
 thoughts and images around, to vary their com- 
 binations, to look at them from different stand- 
 points, and to describe them as they see them. 
 
REPRODUCING A STORY 167 
 
 The successful conduct of this exercise will de- 
 pend, first of all, upon the teacher's ability and 
 facility in doing what the exercise demands. You, 
 the teacher, must have before your mind a vivid, 
 clear-cut mental picture of a hall — a particular hall 
 that you know or that you have seen in a picture 
 — with all its necessary and customary furnishings 
 and adornments. In that hall you must be able to 
 see transpire all the events of the story. You must 
 be able at will to put yourself in the place of any of 
 the actors in the little drama or of any of the pieces 
 of onlooking furniture, to see, to feel, and to describe 
 everything from your assumed standpoint. Only 
 with this ability can you hope to go quickly from 
 one child to another, each one trying to tell the 
 story from the standpoint of and through a different 
 character, immediately to take your place beside 
 each child, to lead each one to the right point of 
 view, to help each one to see clearly what he alone 
 would perhaps see but dimly, in short, by your 
 example to demonstrate concretely to each child 
 what it is to see and to tell a story from different 
 standpoints. Abstract directions, words alone, will 
 not do this ; if you rely on words, you need expect 
 to get nothing better than words in return. 
 
 The best preparation you can make for this exer- 
 cise, and you should not hesitate to make it, is to 
 practice seeing and describing from many stand- 
 points and in the role of different actors and ob- 
 
1 68 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 servers the hall and the events of the story. This 
 practice will make you realize what you are calling 
 upon the pupils to do, will enable you to assist them 
 sympathetically. Just as you have done, each child 
 must get and hold before his mind a clear-cut pic- 
 ture of a concrete hall. Has he one at home ; has 
 he seen such a hall in some house where he has 
 visited ; will the school corridor do ? Lest some 
 child may be lacking the necessary experience, try 
 to have at hand a good picture of a hall with clock 
 and other appropriate furnishings. 
 
 After a little preliminary talk with the pupils — 
 not too much, but just enough to give each one the 
 idea of what is required and to arouse interest — let 
 the written exercise begin. Remember, in passing 
 from child to child, the most delicate, yet the most 
 important thing for you to observe and to direct is 
 not correctness in the spelling of words and the use 
 of marks of punctuation — of course these are not to 
 be neglected — but each child's assumed point of 
 view, his mental picture, and his efforts and success 
 in seeing and describing the picture and events in 
 his own mind. 
 
 The same thought should guide you in directing 
 the correction of the pupils' stories. The exercise 
 is not designed to teach anything new in form ; it is 
 the material, the handling of the material, that is 
 different from anything previously taught. On this 
 phase of the exercise attention should be chiefly con- 
 
POSSESSIVES 169 
 
 centrated, without, of course, overlooking mistakes 
 in form. As in all other correcting exercises, the 
 pupil must be helped to make his own corrections. 
 For instance, if he has undertaken to tell the story 
 from the standpoint of the big mouse, and has told 
 it really from the standpoint of the moon — as in the 
 original — he has evidently failed really to assume 
 the part of the big mouse, to enter into it sympa- 
 thetically. He must be helped to do this ; merely 
 indicating the verbal changes that should be made 
 in his story will do no good — that does not touch 
 the real difficulty. When the child gets into the 
 right attitude, he will see for himself what changes 
 his story requires. Probably a full period — the one 
 following that of the writing exercise — will be re- 
 quired to complete the correcting of the stories. 
 The exercise is worth the double period ; the cor- 
 recting must not be slighted. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Exercises 6, 7, and 8, Chapter Twelve, furnish 
 material for several stories. For further suggestions 
 regarding such use of this material, see pp. 264-266. 
 
 VII (151). Possessives 
 
 Study this lesson with the pupils. Have them 
 explain all the possessives in the story, Toms Escape, 
 accounting for the apostrophe and s as directed in 
 their book. If thought advisable, they may also 
 
170 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 account for capitals and punctuation used in the 
 story. The written part of the exercise should be 
 examined as written, and necessary corrections made 
 at once. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Have the story, Toms Escape, written from dic- 
 tation. 
 
 In having this exercise carefully corrected, as 
 it must be to be of value, require pupils invariably 
 to give reasons for corrections and then to make 
 them. (See pp. 48, 116, 117.) To illustrate, sup- 
 pose a pupil has written Toms in the first sentence. 
 Direct the pupil's attention to this word. If he does 
 not see his mistake at once, ask, " What belongs to 
 Tom ? " (Pupil's answer; " heart") " Then if Tom 
 owns or possesses something, how should Toms be 
 written?" (Pupil's answer: "There should be an 
 apostrophe before s, because Tom's is a possessive.") 
 
 VIII (153). Unstudied Dictation 
 
 Dictate the following exercise. It will test the 
 pupils' power to write the possessive form correctly. 
 It will also review the writing of the days of the 
 week. Have pupils correct their work immedi- 
 ately, giving reasons for each correction. 
 
 Monday's child is fair of face. 
 Tuesday's child is full of grace. 
 Wednesday's child is the child of woe. 
 Thursday's child has far to go. 
 
STUDYING A POEM 171 
 
 Friday's child is loving and giving. 
 Saturday's child works hard for a living. 
 The child that is born on the Sabbath day 
 Is good and bonny and wise and gay. 
 
 IX (153). Studying a Poem 
 
 To make this lesson thoroughly successful and 
 profitable you must prepare yourself for it. You 
 must be able to get fully into the spirit of it, to live 
 through with the little boy that "awful day" when 
 he ran away. Read it over and over — not merely 
 the words, but the ideas ; feel the emotions, stanza by 
 stanza ; make your reading express those emotions 
 and ideas. Thus you will prepare yourself to guide 
 your pupils sympathetically in the reading and 
 study of the poem. 
 
 The exercise with the pupils should begin with 
 your reading of the poem. This should be so 
 effective that the attention and emotion of every 
 child is seized at once, held and led along, stanza 
 by stanza, in sympathy with the changing experi- 
 ences of the little boy. In the first stanza, when 
 the wind coaxes the little boy, he makes a personal 
 appeal ; the voice should express this appeal ; the 
 emphasis should be on the personal pronoun, — 
 " Follow me /" In the second stanza the wind has 
 ceased to coax, for the boy is already won. The 
 wind calls to him gleefully and confidently, as to a 
 vigorous comrade, " Follow me, follow me ! " In the 
 
172 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 third stanza the rough, violent character of the 
 wind appears; there is no trace of coaxing in his 
 voice ; he does not even speak as a comrade ; he 
 commands sternly, "Follow me!" The emphasis 
 — and it is very decided — is on the verb, follow. 
 As the echoing voices repeat, " Follow him ; fol- 
 low ! " the second follow, in imitation of the echo, 
 should be not less decided, but less loud than the 
 first. In the fourth stanza the violence of the wind 
 reaches a climax as he roars, " Follow me ! " but he 
 is now only one of the terrifying monsters that sur- 
 round the poor "scared, scared boy"; there is the 
 black cloud and the growling thunder; there is 
 the hooting gray owl, calling out to the boy, de- 
 manding who he is. In the fifth and last stanza 
 the scene has quite changed ; the storm has passed ; 
 the wind, the black cloud, the thunder, the hooting 
 owl, have gone ; the gentle moon looks down 
 kindly into the face of the chastened little boy and 
 asks him if he is sorry. " If I light you home to 
 your trundle-bed, will you stay there, will you stay, 
 little boy ? " she asks in a tone that every repentant 
 child understands. 
 
 Similarly, trace through from stanza to stanza 
 the change in tone required in reading the two 
 closing lines of each stanza. In the first and sec- 
 ond stanzas there is a certain impressiveness about 
 " that day, that day " ; it is evidently no ordinary 
 day to be lightly forgotten ; it is a memorable 
 
STUDYING A POEM 173 
 
 day, but the reason for this has not yet been re- 
 vealed. We await expectantly and with growing 
 anxiety the revelation concerning that memorable 
 day. The third stanza discloses the true character 
 of the day ; it was awful. It grew more and more 
 awful; in the fourth stanza it is revealed as the 
 most awful, dread day in all the experience of one 
 little boy — a day that will forever stand out with- 
 out a rival as the dread day in all that boy's life. 
 In the fifth stanza, "Oh, what a day" sums up the 
 whole experience of that day from its joyful begin- 
 ning, through its awful developments, to its repent- 
 ant close. The reader must feel all these changes, 
 feel them through and through, and then he will 
 readily and naturally express them in his voice. 
 
 The rendering of the words of the thunder and 
 of the owl must, of course, be imitative. The 
 thunder growls deep and long, " No-0-0-0 ! " The 
 owl hoots, " Who (are) you-00 ! Who (are) you-oo!" 
 The sobbing of the boy as he says, " I'm lost away ! 
 And I want to go home where my parents stay," 
 may be produced by taking short, quick breaths. 
 
 The real reading of this poem must be through 
 the feelings far more than through the intellect. 
 The purpose in studying it, as directed through the 
 questions given in the pupils' book, is not primarily 
 that the pupil may get a mere intellectual under- 
 standing of the poem ; it is that he may get fully 
 into the spirit of it, that he may feel it. The ques- 
 
174 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 tions and the answers to them must be made to 
 serve this purpose, or the exercise will be a failure. 
 To illustrate with some of the questions on the third 
 stanza, it is no satisfactory answer to the second 
 and third questions merely to say that the trees do 
 not like the way the wind treats them, and that the 
 rivers and rills are mad ; the answers must be given 
 in a tone to express the pain of the trees with 
 twisted leaf and limb, and the foaming madness of 
 the rivers and rills. The illustrative reading called 
 for in the course of the questions must not be per- 
 functory, it must express fully and adequately — even 
 sometimes to exaggeration — the thought and feel- 
 ing of the passage. This is in preparation for the 
 expressive, continuous reading of the poem. 
 
 Although the poem is written in the past tense, 
 most of the questions on it are given in the present 
 tense. This adds to the vividness, the reality that 
 must be produced in the pupil's mind. He cannot 
 live through that " awful day " with the little boy in 
 the past; he must do it right now. 
 
 X (159). Dramatizing the Poem, "When the Little 
 Boy Ran Away" 
 
 As far as possible the children should make their 
 own plans, decide upon the characters, and assign 
 the parts for the dramatization of the story. It may 
 be well to read with them the suggestions and ques- 
 tions given in their book, Chapter One (p. 6), in 
 
WRITING A DIALOGUE 175 
 
 preparation for a dramatization. They will readily 
 see the application of these questions and sugges- 
 tions to the present undertaking. 
 
 XI (159). Writing a Dialogue 
 
 Before the children begin to write, make sure that 
 they understand what they are to do. Work out 
 some of the dialogue with them orally. Let them 
 compare the beginning sentences, which have been 
 supplied them, with the beginning of the poem and 
 see why the birds and the boy are made to speak 
 thus. Let them give orally, under your guidance, 
 the exact speech of several of the characters, as out- 
 lined in blank in their book. See that they use the 
 exact words of the poem in cases where the charac- 
 ter speaks in the poem ; that they make the character 
 speak appropriately in cases where the exact words 
 must be supplied. They must not be told what 
 to make a character say; they must be helped, when 
 necessary, to "make up" themselves the words that 
 they will have the character use. For example, if 
 they are trying to supply the last speech of the mother 
 and of the boy, they may be helped in this way : 
 
 Teacher : What did his mother do? 
 
 Pupils : She welcomed the boy home. 
 
 Teacher : What did she say to show that she was glad to see 
 him? 
 
 Pupils : I am so glad you are home again. 
 
 Teacher: If you were that little boy, what would you say to 
 your mother? 
 
176 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 In the preliminary class work, to make clear to all 
 pupils what is to be done and how it is to be done, 
 do not work out the whole dialogue. If you do, 
 there will be too much sameness in the pupils' 
 written work. Leave room for each one's original- 
 ity; work out only enough of the parts to show 
 how it is to be done. As the pupils write, help 
 individually by question or suggestion as needed. 
 
 The exercise should be carefully corrected at this 
 or at the next lesson. The correction should not 
 be limited to the form. The appropriateness of 
 the speeches given to the several characters should 
 be considered. If well done, the dialogue will tell 
 a complete, connected story, without superfluous 
 words and with no detail necessary to its under- 
 standing omitted. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Exercises 8, 10, and 11, Chapter Twelve, may be 
 written in dialogue form. 
 
 XII (160). Finishing a Story- 
 Read the incomplete story with the pupils as it is 
 given in their book. Let it be read so well that 
 every one will get into the spirit of it, will make it 
 his own. Unless the pupil does this, he will be 
 unable to continue and conclude the story appro- 
 priately. Do not talk to the pupils as a class about 
 the details of the ending of the story; that will pro- 
 
A PICTURE STORY 177 
 
 duce too much uniformity in results. Seek merely 
 to arouse the imagination of each one, so that each 
 will invent for himself an ending that he thinks 
 suitable. 
 
 As the children write, go about among them and 
 give such individual hints and suggestions as may 
 be necessary. Lead them to see that the story is 
 not finished by merely telling what the boy saw, as 
 "an Indian," "a bear," "his father." What hap- 
 pened then ? What did the boy do ? What did the 
 do ? What became of the boy ? Some con- 
 versation may well be introduced. 
 
 The endings, if really original and individual, 
 will show much interesting variety. They should 
 be read and discussed — criticized — by the class, 
 and the best ones determined upon. 
 
 XIII (162). A Picture Story 
 
 (Children and the cave, p. 163) 
 
 The outline for a story is given in the children's 
 book. After making sure that they understand 
 what is expected of them, let them study alone the 
 questions and suggestions given to them. After 
 they have had time to think out their stories have 
 some of them told orally. 
 
 Many variations from the outline given in the 
 pupils' book will suggest themselves, variations 
 which will work out into very different stories. 
 Following are a few of the possible variations. 
 
1 78 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 i. The children may find the cave. As they were about to 
 enter, perhaps they heard a noise that frightened Gretchen and 
 made her pull her brother back. Perhaps she said, " That cave 
 may be the home of a savage animal. I'm afraid." Suppose it 
 was a wolfs den. How might the dwarfs help the children ? 
 
 Suppose it was the owl that screeched and frightened the chil- 
 dren. What might happen? 
 
 Suppose the dwarfs heard Gretchen say the cave was the home 
 of a savage animal. They knew it was their home, and they were 
 sorry for the little girl. What might they say? ("Don't be 
 afraid, little girl. That is not the home of a savage animal. It is 
 our home. Come right in. No one shall harm you.") 
 
 If the children entered the cave, what would they see? [A 
 great room with walls of rock, lighted by what ? (A fairy ball of 
 crystal? Many fireflies? Many glowworms? The moon shin- 
 ing through an opening? A great blazing diamond? A wonder- 
 ful star?) In the corner of the room a heap of shining treasure 
 that the dwarfs had gathered — gold, silver, diamonds, emeralds, 
 rubies, etc.?] 
 
 If the children had wandered long in the forest they would be 
 tired and hungry. What might the dwarfs give them to eat? 
 (Things found in the woods and mountains — nuts, berries, fruits, 
 clear cool water, honey?) What kind of bed might they give 
 them? (Birds' feathers gathered by the dwarfs, soft moss, thistle- 
 down, rose leaves?) 
 
 Next morning would the dwarfs show the children the way 
 home? 
 
 Fairies usually give gifts to those who visit them. What gifts 
 might the dwarfs give the children as they were leaving? 
 
 2. The children may be poor and come to the forest to ask 
 the dwarfs to help them, knowing that the dwarfs have great 
 treasure. They can only see the dwarfs at night when the moon 
 is full. Hence their reason for being in the wood alone at night. 
 
 How might the owl have helped them? (Led them to the 
 dwarfs' cave? Called the dwarfs to see them?) 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 
 
 179 
 
 Maybe the owl was the dwarfs' sentinel, keeping watch over the 
 cave while the dwarfs worked. Perhaps he challenged the chil- 
 dren, calling, "Who? Who? Who goes there?" This brought 
 the dwarfs up from the ground. 
 
 See the face on the tree over the cave. Perhaps the dwarfs 
 had it to frighten people from the cave. 
 
 The children were brave and loving. Did the dwarfs help 
 them? Finish the story. 
 
 3. The dwarfs might give the children some task to do, the 
 faithful performance of which would determine whether or not 
 they would help the children. What task — sorting out the 
 precious stones without taking one, gathering dewdrops in tiny 
 cups, going through the forest seeking creatures that needed their 
 help and giving it gladly, Gretchen to make or mend clothes for 
 the dwarfs or clean house, while Hans carried treasure into the 
 cave? How did the children perform their tasks? Did they get 
 what they wanted? 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 1. This story gives excellent material for dram- 
 atizing. Let the children plan and carry out the 
 dramatization with as little help and suggestion as 
 possible. (See p. 149.) 
 
 2. Let the little boy tell the story of his ex- 
 periences. 
 
 3. Let the little girl tell her story. 
 
 4. Have the children make other stories of selfish 
 boys or girls who saw the treasure that Hans and 
 Gretchen brought from the forest and went to see 
 the dwarfs. As these children were selfish, lazy, and 
 cruel, did the dwarfs give any help ? What did they 
 do? 
 
180 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XIV (165). Writing a Story 
 
 Before allowing the children to write answers to 
 the questions given in their books, have them answer 
 the questions orally in complete statements that 
 will make a connected whole. This does not mean 
 that each question should be answered by one state- 
 ment. For example, the third question from the 
 end, " What did these people do for them ? " may be 
 answered completely with one sentence, or several 
 sentences may be used. For instance, the answer 
 may be: "The dwarfs let the children stay in their 
 cave all night." Or it may be : " The dwarfs took 
 the children into their cave. They showed them 
 all their treasure. After they had given the children 
 something to eat, they showed them two little beds. 
 Here the children slept until morning." 
 
 XV (165). More Picture Stories 
 
 (The child and the brownie, p. 166.) 
 
 The center of interest in this story is in the con- 
 tents of the casket. What gift does it hold? A 
 fairy gift must be different from ordinary gifts. It 
 may be : 
 
 1. Money — money that never gives out. 
 
 2. A purse — one that will never be empty. 
 
 3. Shoes or any clothing — that will never wear out. 
 
 4. Food — always a fresh supply. 
 
 5. A magic tablecloth. (Say, "Spread," and a dainty re- 
 past will be ready ; " Away," and it will fold itself inside the box.) 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 181 
 
 6. A bottle of magic water that will make the sick well, the 
 sad happy, the sorrowful glad. 
 
 7. A fairy ring. (Turn ring and wish; if the wish is good 
 it will come true ; if foolish, ring will tighten on finger ; if bad, 
 ring will fall from the hand and roll away.) 
 
 8. A fairy wand. 
 
 9. A wishing airship — one that takes a person wherever he 
 wishes to go. 
 
 10. A bird that makes the most wonderful music — music 
 that makes every one who hears it happy. 
 
 n. A cloak or hat that makes one invisible. 
 
 12. A magic sword. 
 
 13. A key that will open all doors. 
 
 14. A spinning wheel that spins threads of gold. 
 
 15. A tiny tree that bears a golden acorn every day. 
 
 16. A magic seed from which grows a wonderful plant. 
 
 The above are a few of the gifts that children 
 have found in the casket. Your children will find 
 others, as well as, perhaps, some of these. 
 
 The gift and the use that can be made of it, the 
 use that the child and her mother do make of it, will 
 determine the ending of the story. 
 
 For supplementary work the children can make 
 other stories telling what the child did with her 
 gift. 
 
 The questions in the children's book suggest 
 varied answers which they should be encouraged to 
 give. Let them study the lesson by themselves in 
 preparation for the oral telling of the story ; you 
 need help them only in selecting a suitable fairy 
 gift. 
 
182 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XVI (169). Writing Stories 
 
 Have children finish the story orally before writ- 
 ing the ending. Let each child choose for himself 
 the story, as begun in his book, which he will finish ; 
 or let any one who will, write a complete story from 
 the beginning. 
 
 XVII (170). A Fairy Wish 
 
 Let the children write the answer to the question 
 of the lesson entirely without help. Have a few of 
 their papers read, compared, and discussed by the 
 children. 
 
 The comparison and discussion should be so 
 directed as to bring out the merits of the papers, 
 particularly respecting the wisdom and originality 
 of the wish. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Have each child find a picture that tells a story — 
 that tells a story to him. Most pupils will bring a 
 picture from home. Some through carelessness, 
 indifference, or on account of home conditions will 
 fail to bring any. Therefore, the teacher, with the 
 help of those who can get a supply at home, should 
 make a collection of pictures and keep them in a 
 box or a drawer that is easily accessible to the chil- 
 dren. Good pictures can be found in magazines, 
 old copies of which can often be procured at the 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 183 
 
 reading rooms of public libraries. Some advertise- 
 ments are good. 
 
 Tell the children, the day before the lesson is to be 
 given, that they are to come with a picture that tells 
 them a story and that each may show his picture to 
 the class and tell the children the story he finds in 
 it. Let those who cannot get a picture at home, or 
 who have failed to bring one, select one from the 
 teacher's collection. Do not select a picture for a 
 child ; let the child choose one that speaks to him. 
 
 Let children tell their stories, helping them to 
 get them into good form. Then have them write 
 the stories and mount their pictures on their cor- 
 rected, copied papers. 
 
CHAPTER EIGHT 
 
 A study of the work of this chapter, which should 
 be made before taking it up with the children, will 
 show that it involves the continued use in varied 
 ways of all the knowledge and power that pupils 
 have acquired in their previous work. 
 
 Its one large step in advance — and it is a most signifi- 
 cant one — consists in the critical analysis and study of 
 typical fables to learn their nature, content, purpose, and 
 the way they are made. 
 
 This study serves as the basis of the children's 
 first efforts at making original fables. 
 
 1(171). A Study of Fables 
 
 The most fundamental thing in the teaching of 
 language is not form, but material. The pupils 
 mind must be richly stored, not with material that 
 is foreign, that he carries about with him undigested 
 as a burden, but with material that he has assimi- 
 lated, that has become a part of his very life. The 
 mental life of the child, if it is to grow rich and 
 deep, broad and strong, craves and must be pro- 
 vided with material of greatest variety ; it needs the 
 concrete facts of observation; it needs the ideas 
 
 184 
 
A STUDY OF FABLES 185 
 
 that are born of the comparison of facts ; it needs 
 equally the fanciful, poetic, mysterious, magic, won- 
 derful ideas that feed the imagination ; it needs no 
 less the varied stimuli that exercise and develop the 
 feelings, the emotions, and the will. 
 
 Fables, the earliest form of literature originating 
 in the childhood of the race, never fail to interest 
 the children of all races and of every succeeding 
 generation. Some of their most obvious character- 
 istics which make them universally interesting are 
 these: they are concrete; they are brief; they are 
 easily and fully comprehensible ; they are pointed ; 
 they deal with those elementary, universal notions 
 and feelings of right and wrong, of justice, of sim- 
 ple wisdom and shrewdness, on which our civilized 
 life has been built up ; they teach an easily under- 
 stood lesson with almost the force and conviction 
 of a personal experience. On account of these 
 characteristics, which are within the ready recogni- 
 tion of the eight- or nine-year-old child, and on 
 account of the interest which they invariably arouse, 
 fables form the best avenue of approach to the prac- 
 tical understanding of the production of real litera- 
 ture ; they afford the best early lessons for the 
 child — as they have already done for the race — 
 in producing real literature. With such initiation 
 into the simple secrets of the construction of fables 
 as the first and succeeding lessons of this chapter 
 in the pupils' book give, children readily become 
 
186 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 eager to try their hands at the writing of fables. 
 And when they really succeed, as almost all chil- 
 dren can, in writing very creditable fables, often- 
 times fables that will bear favorable comparison 
 with the classic ones of the books, it is an invaluable 
 experience for them, a wonderful achievement in 
 the process of learning really to use ideas and lan- 
 guage in the creation of literature. They begin to 
 see what real use they can make of language. They 
 are invariably enthusiastic in the use of their new- 
 born power — they want to write fables and still 
 more fables, to make whole books of fables. 
 
 This is the teacher's opportunity not merely to 
 train the pupil in the effective expression of his own 
 ideas, but equally in the use of correct form. How? 
 Very easily. First of all, enter heartily into the 
 enthusiasm of your pupils. They want to write 
 fables; you must want them to write fables. 
 They want to make books of fables — class books, 
 group books, individual books ; you want them 
 to make such books. They want to write fables 
 as good as, or better than, the printed fables in 
 their books; you want them to write such superior 
 fables. And all that you have to do is to help 
 them and guide them sympathetically, apprecia- 
 tively, in their efforts. It will not now be neces- 
 sary to beat into them with endless repetitions a 
 few correct language forms and a few words for 
 the enrichment of their vocabularies ; they are in a 
 
A STUDY OF FABLES 187 
 
 position to appreciate the value of correct forms and 
 of appropriate words ; they want to know what such 
 forms and words are because they want to use 
 them ; they want them for what they really are — 
 they want them as means to an end in which they 
 are interested. A single use of a language form or 
 of a new word under such conditions is more effec- 
 tive than scores of formal, uninteresting repetitions. 
 Similarly, information that the pupil needs to use — 
 and no little information is necessary to the writing 
 of good fables — is grasped and assimilated through 
 use most effectively. 
 
 After you have helped your children sympatheti- 
 cally to study the first lesson in their books, to which 
 two periods may well be devoted, they should under- 
 stand at least these three simple characteristics of 
 fables, that usually they are short stories, that they 
 are about animals, and that each teaches some lesson 
 about conduct. It may be of interest to them to 
 know the probable reason why fables are usually 
 about animals. 
 
 In the long ago when fables originated, men lived 
 in much closer relations to the various beasts of 
 forest and field than they do to-day ; they knew the 
 beasts then — knew them as friends, enemies, rivals 
 — much more intimately than we do to-day. They 
 were impressed with the peculiarities of the different 
 beasts, the busyness of the bee, the slyness of the fox, 
 the boldness of the lion, the timidity and fleetness of 
 
188 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the deer ; they spoke of these peculiarities, exagger- 
 ated them, and told stories illustrating them. These 
 stories were the early fables. Later fables, based on 
 the older ones, continued to use animals as their 
 chief characters. 
 
 The lessons of some fables are not easy to state. 
 Hence the first ones chosen for study with the children 
 should teach lessons not too difficult to formulate in 
 words. The keenest insight and the most skillful 
 work of the teacher is required at this point. She 
 must help her pupils to see, to understand and to 
 feel the lesson, and she must help them to express 
 it effectively in good language. Such help does not 
 consist in telling them what the lesson is ; if trrey 
 cannot be led to grasp it without telling, they can 
 hardly understand the telling of it. No more does 
 such help consist in formulating the lesson for them 
 in language. The skillful help demanded consists 
 here — as almost everywhere else — in getting the 
 pupil to do all he possibly can for himself and in 
 doing the least that will suffice for him. He must 
 think for himself — and think earnestly — what the 
 lesson of a fable is, he must summon the best lan- 
 guage at his command in his effort to express that 
 lesson. When he has done this, he is in the best 
 possible condition to appreciate the bit of help that 
 the teacher may give, to receive and make his own 
 the word or turn of phrase that the teacher may 
 suggest. 
 
THE FABLE ABOUT THE WISE BOAR 189 
 
 You will note that the grasp of the lesson of a 
 fable consists in seeing a general truth in a concrete 
 embodiment — a mental process of some difficulty, 
 but a process which is fundamental to growth in 
 mental power, in capacity to think. Hence, in the 
 study of fables as here suggested, the child is not 
 merely learning words and the correct use of them 
 in writing, he is not merely "making up " stories, an 
 exercise that narrow, shortsighted, falsely self-styled 
 "practical 3S people are inclined to disapprove, he is 
 developing mental fiber and alertness, he is using and 
 so strengthening his power to think, an exercise that 
 too many pupils in all grades of schools — for reasons 
 that cannot be here discussed — altogether miss. 
 
 Most of the fables whose lessons the pupils are 
 asked in their book to state have already been given 
 and studied. Any that they may not have clearly 
 in mind should be told, either by you or by pupils 
 who are familiar with them. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 Have pupils read fables numbered 1, 2, 3, 10, and 
 11, in Chapter Twelve (p. 276), and try to tell the 
 lesson that each one teaches. 
 
 II (174). The Study of the Fable, "The Wise Boar" 
 
 In this and similar study lessons the teacher 
 should conduct the work in a way to enlist the 
 active attention and effort of every child and to 
 
i 9 o TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 accomplish the most possible in a given time. This 
 means not merely efficiency in the study of a given 
 lesson, but, what is more important, it means prac- 
 tice in forming the habit in every pupil of concen- 
 tration and efficient work. It is not usually consist- 
 ent with efficient treatment of a study exercise like 
 the one under discussion to allow one child to answer 
 questions at length, for instance all questions on a 
 topic. It is far better to have a large number of 
 children answer a question each and in order. For 
 example, the study of the second paragraph of the 
 fable, The Wise Boar (p. 176), might well be some- 
 thing like this. 
 
 First Pupil : Reads paragraph. 
 
 Second Pupil : Tells number of sentences in it. 
 
 Third Pupil: Tells why A is a capital letter. 
 
 Fourth Pupil : Tells why the comma is used. 
 
 Fifth Pupil: Tells where and why quotation marks are used. 
 
 Sixth Pupil: Tells why Why begins with a capital letter. 
 
 Seventh Pupil: Tells where and why the question mark is used. 
 
 Eighth Pupil: Tells why There begins with a capital letter. 
 
 Ninth Pupil: Tells where and why the period is used. 
 
 Here nine children take part in the recitation, 
 and it should not consume more than two or three 
 minutes. Not a moment should be wasted by the 
 teacher in unnecessary talk or comment. If the 
 pupils are allowed to recite in order, standing a row 
 at a time, it will be quite unnecessary to call them 
 by name and still more unnecessary to deliberate 
 about who shall be called upon. 
 
TELLING ORIGINAL FABLES 191 
 
 III (176). Writing a Fable from Dictation 
 
 Without further study dictate the fable, The Wise 
 Boar. The purpose of this dictation is to fix the 
 model form of a fable in preparation for the telling 
 and writing of original fables which are called for in 
 following lessons. 
 
 In correcting their papers with the pupils — 
 which should immediately follow the dictation — 
 pay especial attention to the mechanical arrange- 
 ment of their work. 
 
 Keep pupils' papers until after Section V, then 
 put the papers of the two lessons together. 
 
 IV (176). Telling Original Fables 
 
 See that the children understand what is ex- 
 pected of them. Do not approve or even allow to 
 pass a fable that does not teach the same lesson that 
 the model fable teaches ; the offering of such a 
 fable indicates that its author does not fully under- 
 stand the model fable and what is expected of him. 
 
 Encourage the children to model their fables as 
 closely as they can on the type fable. Make the 
 exercise alive ; see that every one is wide awake and 
 thinking earnestly and quickly. As pupils are 
 ready, have them tell their fables in rapid succes- 
 sion ; a dozen may be told in a few minutes. Let 
 each child, when he tells his fable, come to the front 
 of the room, face the class, and speak distinctly and 
 loud enough to be heard by all. 
 
192 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Keep the children's fables brief; allow the use of 
 no more words than are needed to tell the story. 
 Stop at once all such verbose utterances as this: 
 "Once upon a time there was a little boy. He was 
 sharpening his skates. It was a rainy day and he 
 could not go skating." If the pupil reciting does 
 not at once see the mistake he is making, refer him 
 to the opening sentences of The Wise Boar and The 
 Fisherman and His Nets, Let him study these 
 carefully until he is able to put his three wordy sen- 
 tences into one, about like this : " One rainy day a 
 boy was sharpening his skates." 
 
 V ( 1 79). Writing an Original Fable 
 
 See that the pupils do exactly as directed in their 
 book. 
 
 There are many characteristics of a lesson like 
 this which make it admirably adapted to fourth- 
 grade pupils. The requirements are definite and 
 easily understood. They have a model to lean upon 
 and to imitate ; at the same time there is demand 
 for a little originality, a little invention, and oppor- 
 tunity for considerable. Thus, while the exercise is 
 within the capacity of the slowest, most common- 
 place mind, it invites the fullest use of the quickest 
 and the most original thought. Finally, the exercise 
 is brief, must be brief to be good, and so can be 
 completed and corrected in a short time. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 193 
 
 The correcting should be most conscientiously 
 done ; it is in the correcting that the pupil learns 
 what he did not know before. See that each pupil 
 does as directed before offering his fable to you for 
 your judgment and assistance, that is, that he study 
 it carefully by himself and make such improvements 
 in it as he can. In your correcting of the fables with 
 the children, direct attention not merely to the words 
 and forms, but especially to the thought and the more 
 general method of its expression. Is the thought 
 clear and logical, and so expressed ? Does the fable 
 teach the desired lesson clearly and pointedly ? Is 
 every thought expressed wholly relevant ? Is it ex- 
 pressed in the most concise, . effective paragraphs, 
 sentences, and words that the author can use ? 
 
 In trying to get pupils to correct such defects as 
 these questions suggest, it will do no good to talk 
 to them in the abstract terms in which these ques- 
 tions are expressed ; they cannot understand such 
 language. Simply refer them to the type fables; 
 direct their attention to the characteristics of the 
 type fables which their fables lack ; then they can 
 understand, for you bring the matter to them in the 
 concrete. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 I. Pupils may write one or more additional fables 
 teaching the same lesson as those already studied 
 and written. Each one may take for his title one 
 of the subjects given (p. 1 j8), or an original subject. 
 
194 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Probably many pupils in the class, with a little en- 
 couragement, will voluntarily write a considerable 
 number of fables outside of school. 
 
 2. With fable No. 10, Chapter Twelve, as a 
 model, children may write original fables teaching 
 the same lesson as that taught by The Wolf arid 
 the Goat. (See Manual, p. 267.) 
 
 3. Let pupils write as many titles as they can on 
 which they think fables might be written, teaching 
 the same lesson as The Wise Boar teaches. 
 
 VI (180). The Wise Judge: A Story to be Read and 
 
 Studied 
 
 Read the story through with the children. In 
 the suggested conversation and discussion that is to 
 follow, encourage the children to speculate freely, 
 but intelligently, regarding the judge's acts and 
 motives — a splendid opportunity for the exercise of 
 intelligent imagination. Perhaps the judge was 
 familiar with the goldsmith's shop, knew that the 
 ceiling was low and covered with dust and cobwebs, 
 and hence surmised that the thief would probably 
 brush off some on his fez. Perhaps the judge had 
 visited the shop during the day, had seen a place 
 where the dust and cobwebs had been recently 
 brushed away and guessed that it was done by the 
 thief. Perhaps he suspected who the thief was and 
 took this means of making sure. Possibly he even 
 knew the thief all the time and acted and talked as 
 
DRAMATIZING "THE WISE JUDGE" 195 
 
 he did merely to impress the people with his wis- 
 dom. Perhaps he knew nothing about the thief, or 
 dust and cobwebs ; perhaps no one had cobwebs on 
 his fez ; perhaps the guilty one instinctively tried — 
 as the shrewd judge hoped he would do — to remove 
 from his fez the suggested evidence. of his guilt. 
 Perhaps — but the children, with encouragement 
 and skillful suggestion, will offer an indefinite num- 
 ber of possible explanations. 
 
 See that the pupils understand what is meant by 
 the word fez, then see that they use it freely in 
 conversation and in dramatizing. 
 
 Let children study alone the questions and sug- 
 gestions in preparation for the dramatizing. But if 
 you can give a few minutes to it just before the 
 actual dramatizing, let different children tell what 
 might be the words used by the thief, the judge, and 
 the people in those places where these must be sup- 
 plied by the pupil. 
 
 VII (185). Dramatizing "The Wise Judge" 
 
 Preliminary to the actual, free dramatizing of the 
 story, read it through with the children, you or 
 one of the pupils reading the narrative parts while 
 pupils, as directed, read the conversational parts. 
 As these pupils read, let them dramatize with 
 books in their hands, moving from place to place as 
 the action requires, making appropriate gestures 
 and reading from their books. 
 
196 TFACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Let the pupils now choose the actors for the sev- 
 eral parts and carry out the dramatization freely 
 with as little help from you as possible. After their 
 production has been discussed and improvements 
 suggested, let other pupils dramatize the story again, 
 trying to make the suggested improvements. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 Let the story be reproduced orally. 
 
 VIII (185). Study of a Fable in Dialogue Form 
 
 Study this story with the children. Aim to 
 secure from them concise, connected, relevant state- 
 ments, each one advancing the story toward its 
 climax and completion. This will make the whole 
 story brief, as it should be. 
 
 Use the word parenthesis, that is introduced into 
 the pupils' book, freely as occasion requires, and see 
 that the children use it. In this way they will 
 quickly learn without formal lesson or definition 
 what the parenthesis is and its use. See what is 
 said about the use of the terms sentence (p. 47) and 
 paragraph (p. 159). 
 
 After the children have worked out and told the 
 story under your guidance, tell it to them yourself, 
 carefully observing the characteristics that you have 
 been working for — conciseness, brevity, point. 
 Your story may be something like this: 
 
WRITING A STORY FROM A DIALOGUE 197 
 
 The Man and the Satyr 
 
 One night a man who was lost in the woods found the cave of 
 a satyr. 
 
 " I am cold and hungry," he said. " May I rest here for the 
 night? " 
 
 " Come right in," said the satyr. " You are welcome." 
 
 The man entered the cave. As his fingers were still numb 
 with the cold, he blew upon them with his warm breath. 
 
 " Why do you do that? " asked the satyr. 
 
 "To warm my fingers," answered the man. 
 
 Soon the satyr gave the man some broth. As the broth was 
 very hot, the man took some up in his spoon and blew upon it. 
 
 "Why do you do that?" asked the satyr. "Is the broth too 
 cold?" 
 
 " It is too hot and I am cooling it," replied the man. 
 
 " Get out of my cave at once," cried the satyr. " I will have 
 no man here who blows hot and cold with the same breath." 
 
 So saying, he drove the man out into the night. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Let the children turn Exercise 7, Chapter Twelve, 
 into narrative form (p. 265). 
 
 IX (188). Writing a Story from a Dialogue 
 
 As soon as children begin writing, pass from desk 
 to desk and see that each one is doing as his book 
 directs. Be particularly careful to see that they are 
 stopping at the end of each sentence to ask them- 
 selves the question that their book tells them to ask. 
 This is most important. In asking themselves this 
 question they are not only drilling themselves most 
 
198 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 effectively in the correct writing of quotations ; they 
 are also learning to write consciously in sentences, 
 getting the feeling for the sentence, the sentence 
 sense. 
 
 X (188). Picture Stories 
 
 (The three doors, p. 189) 
 
 Let the children study the lesson in their books 
 and write the part under (i) before discussing the 
 picture or story with them. Have their papers read 
 and discussed. Which are best? (Those that are 
 most convincing, most reasonable.) Talk over- 
 other ways of setting the princess free — ways that 
 may be suggested by pupils' papers or that may 
 have occurred to you. The following ideas may be 
 suggestive. 
 
 1. On the way to the doors the prince may have turned aside 
 to spare some tiny insect, who, to repay him for his kindness, 
 discovers the right room for him, either by creeping through 
 keyholes or crevices of doors, or by calling to his relatives, the 
 poisonous insects, to give him the information. 
 
 2. The prince may open the door into the lion's den. The 
 huge beast may spring toward him, — but stop to lick his feet. 
 When only a cub, this lion was rescued by the prince, a kindness 
 that he remembers. He gladly tells the prince which room the 
 princess occupies. 
 
 3. The prince may water the rose when all but withered, re- 
 move a caterpillar that is destroying the blossoms, or drive away 
 a fierce animal who is about to uproot the bush. In return the 
 rose tells him which door to open. 
 
 4. A fairy — one whom the prince has helped, or his fairy god- 
 mother — may help him in any of the following ways: (a) by 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 199 
 
 giving him a cloak that will make him invisible, so that if he opens 
 the wrong door the inmates cannot harm him ; (b) by giving him 
 a magic glass with which he can see through wood and stone ; 
 (<r) by giving him a musical instrument, the tones of which will 
 cause a deep sleep to fall on all who hear it ; (d) by teaching him 
 some magic word by which he can turn anything or anybody to 
 stone ; (e) by giving him a charm that will make every creature 
 love him. 
 
 Study questions under (2) with the children. 
 Who shut the princess in the castle ? Why ? (An 
 ogre who ruled in her father's place and wanted her 
 out of the way ? A witch who had not been invited 
 to the christening of the princess and sought to be 
 revenged ? Her father who wanted to make sure 
 she would marry a man who was brave and kind, 
 for the prince who succeeded by his own powers 
 must be brave, and only he who was kind and good 
 could have the help of the fairies ? A fairy, to 
 punish the princess for her pride or unkindness to 
 insects and beasts ?) 
 
 Help the children to make a complete story. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 Have children write the princess's story. It might 
 begin something like this: 
 
 I am the princess Maydew. For many years I was shut up in 
 
 a palace by . I was told that there I must stay until a prince 
 
 opened the door and set me free. To make his task as hard as 
 possible — (the three rooms with similar locks). 
 
 (Vivid description of her feelings as prince after prince tried.) 
 
 (The coming of the right prince.) 
 
200 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 XI (191). More Picture Stories 
 
 (The chained prisoners, p. 192) 
 
 Let the children think out the ideas for their 
 stories alone by studying the picture and answering 
 to themselves the questions under (i). When they 
 have done this and before they write their stories, 
 talk their ideas over with them, helping them to 
 arrange them in good story form. Let this be done 
 in such a way that each child will understand that 
 it is his own ideas that he is to put into story form, 
 not the ideas of other children. The success with 
 which you handle this rather difficult matter will be 
 shown in the variety and originality of the written 
 stories. 
 
 XII (193). A Poem to Read and Study- 
 Before taking up the study of this poem with the 
 children, make yourself thoroughly familiar with the 
 suggestions for its study given in the pupils' book. 
 In preparation for reading the poem to the children, 
 which should be the beginning of its study with 
 them, practice reading it until you can bring out 
 with your voice all the beauty and meaning of it. 
 Suitably rendered, there is nothing in it difficult for 
 children to understand and appreciate. 
 
 If at the end of the study the children have not 
 clear mental pictures of the various scenes described 
 and suggested in the poem, if they are not filled 
 
MEMORIZING A POEM 201 
 
 with the beauty and the rhythm of the poetry, then 
 the study has not been a success. Find out why it 
 failed ; you will certainly not find the cause of the 
 failure in the incapacity or irresponsiveness of the 
 children. 
 
 XIII (198). Copying the Poem, "Little Blue Pigeon" 
 
 Before having the poem copied go over it with 
 the children, studying with them the use of each 
 dash as their book directs. 
 
 Pupils should be trained to be observant and 
 critical, to notice and seek an explanation for every 
 mark new to them. To satisfy this demand we 
 give them this simple explanation of the use of the 
 dash in this place. It is quite unnecessary and would 
 be confusing to the children to try to teach them 
 all the uses of the dash at this time. Other uses of 
 the dash will be explained as their work calls for 
 these uses. 
 
 Pass from desk to desk to see if pupils are cor- 
 recting their own work as their book directs. Make 
 constant effort to get them into the habit of self- 
 correction ; it is a most important habit for them to 
 form. 
 
 XIV (199). Memorizing the Poem, "Little Blue Pigeon" 
 
 After the pupils have been given a few minutes 
 in which to study the stanzas they may select to 
 learn, call on them to recite their stanzas. Call for 
 
202 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the stanzas in order. Who has learned the first 
 stanza ? If no one has memorized this stanza, read 
 it to the children. Call for each succeeding stanza, 
 reading any that no one has memorized so as to 
 keep the complete poem in the children's minds. 
 Hearing the different stanzas recited or read re- 
 peatedly, most of the children will soon be able, 
 with little or no further conscious study, to repeat 
 the whole poem. All should learn it entire, study- 
 ing wherever and as much as necessary. (For 
 further directions and suggestions regarding the 
 memorizing of poetry, see pages 86 and 137.) 
 
 Insist that the meaning and the beauty of the 
 stanzas be brought out as fully as possible at every 
 repetition ; there is no value in merely repeating 
 the words. 
 
 Keep all poems memorized fresh in pupils' minds 
 by occasional repetition. In a few odd moments 
 from time to time — moments which might other- 
 wise be wasted — several pupils can repeat the 
 poems that they like best. 
 
CHAPTER NINE 
 
 Before taking up this chapter with the children 
 study it thoroughly to appreciate the way in which 
 all the main ideas of previous chapters are further 
 developed, and the forms already learned are kept in 
 constant review through use. 
 
 The new work presented is as follows : 
 
 1. Exclamations and the use of the exclamation mark. 
 
 2. The use of the comma with a noun of direct address. 
 
 3. The names of the months, their origin and meaning; 
 learning to write them in full and abbreviated. 
 
 4. The writing of dates. 
 
 5. The writing of the names of holidays. 
 
 I (200). "What Frightened the Animals." — The Use 
 of the Exclamation Mark; the Use of the Comma 
 with Noun of Direct Address 
 
 First read the story with the children. Let it be 
 read so well that the children can readily under- 
 stand what is meant when their book tells them 
 (p. 204) that "an exclamation mark is placed after 
 every sentence expressing sudden strong feeling." 
 
 The story contains two new forms of punctuation 
 that must stand as types to the pupils: (1) the use 
 of commas to separate the name of the person ad- 
 
 203 
 
204 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 dressed from the rest of the sentence ; (2) the use 
 of the exclamation mark after a sentence that ex- 
 presses strong or sudden feeling. See that pupils 
 thoroughly master these type forms. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 Give pupils an exercise in looking through familiar 
 selections in their reading books to find as many 
 places as possible where the comma and the ex- 
 clamation mark are used as in the type forms ex- 
 plained in this lesson. Of course suitable selections 
 must be assigned for this exercise. 
 
 II (204). A Copying Exercise to Give Practice in the 
 Uses of the Exclamation Mark and the Comma 
 Learned in the Last Lesson 
 
 Work with the pupils and show them how to com- 
 pare their copies with the original and how to correct 
 their own mistakes. The habit of such comparison 
 and correction is not only invaluable to the pupil, 
 it will save you and all the pupil's future teachers an 
 immense amount of unnecessary work and drudgery. 
 This habit cannot be too early nor too firmly estab- 
 lished. 
 
 III (204). Studied Dictation to Give Further Practice 
 
 in Uses of Exclamation Mark and Comma 
 
 Allow pupils two or three minutes to look carefully 
 through the 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, and nth para- 
 graphs of the story, What Frightened the Animals. 
 
STUDIED DICTATION 
 
 205 
 
 See that they understand clearly why they are look- 
 ing over these paragraphs — that they may be able 
 to write them correctly in all respects, particularly 
 in the use of the exclamation mark and the new use 
 of the comma that they have been studying in the 
 last two lessons. 
 
 Dictate these paragraphs, — by complete sentences 
 only. (See p. 145.) 
 
 Be careful about the correction of the pupils' 
 papers ; this is the most important part of the ex- 
 ercise. If a pupil has omitted a comma to separate 
 the name of the person addressed from the rest of 
 the sentence, question and direct as follows: 
 
 Who is speaking? 
 To whom? 
 
 Show me the name of the person addressed. 
 How should the name of the person addressed be separated 
 from the rest of the sentence ? 
 Do it! 
 
 If a pupil has omitted the exclamation mark, read 
 the quotation which precedes the omitted mark, 
 showing distinctly by your voice what feeling is 
 expressed, then ask and direct : 
 
 What sudden strong feeling does the animal show? 
 (Pupil's answer : fear) 
 
 What mark is used after a sentence that shows sudden strong 
 feeling, like fear? 
 
 (Pupil's answer : An exclamation mark) 
 Make it! 
 
206 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 IV (204). Unstudied Dictation to Test Use of Excla- 
 mation Mark and Comma 
 
 " Grandmother, what long arms you have ! " cried the little girl. 
 " The better to hug you, my dear," said the wolf. 
 " Grandmother, what long ears you have ! " 
 " The better to hear you, my dear." 
 
 Dictate the above extract from Little Red Riding 
 Hood, first reminding the children of the main events 
 of the story that precede this dictation. In dictat- 
 ing, make your voice and expression consistent with 
 the use of the exclamation mark. If you merely 
 dictate the words of Little Red Riding Hood, with- 
 out feeling, the pupil is right if he uses a comma to 
 separate the quotation from the rest of the sentence, 
 and you are wrong if you consider this an error. 
 
 Before dictating, call to the pupils' minds the two 
 points which the dictation is primarily to test, some- 
 thing as follows. Read the quotation in the first 
 sentence of the dictation with appropriate expression 
 and ask and have answered the following questions: 
 
 What feeling does this sentence express? 
 
 What mark must be placed after it? 
 
 Who is addressed ? 
 
 What mark must be used with the name of the person addressed? 
 
 Where is this mark to be placed in this sentence ? 
 
 If you think necessary, talk over every sentence of 
 the dictation in this way before it is given. Antici- 
 pate errors. 
 
UNSTUDIED DICTATION 
 
 207 
 
 If the results of this dictation indicate that the 
 pupils need further drill on the uses of the exclama- 
 tion mark and the comma, write on the board the 
 extract dictated, together with the remainder of the 
 conversation between the wolf and Little Red Riding 
 Hood, and have the children study each sentence 
 aloud as they did in the first lesson of this chapter. 
 
 The remainder of the conversation is as follows: 
 
 " Grandmother, what great eyes you have ! " 
 "The better to see you, my dear." 
 " Grandmother, what big teeth you have ! " 
 "The better to eat you, my dear." 
 
 In their reading of the sentences, as in your dicta- 
 tion of them, the pupils should be required to read 
 those followed by an exclamation mark in a way to 
 justify that mark, even though they are reading but 
 the single sentence. Failure so to read an exclama- 
 tory sentence is failure to read the sentence correctly 
 just as much as would be the omission or the mis- 
 calling of words. Just as a word correctly and 
 thoughtfully pronounced is half spelled, so a sentence 
 correctly and thoughtfully spoken is half written. 
 
 After the study dictate the complete extract writ- 
 ten on the board. 
 
 Correct papers with the pupils, leading each one to 
 discover his own errors and requiring each one to 
 tell what he should have written and to make the 
 necessary corrections. Conduct the correcting ex- 
 ercise as directed in the last lesson. 
 
208 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 Exercises 1 1 and 12, Chapter Twelve, may be used 
 in studied dictation to test the use of the comma with 
 a noun of direct address. 
 
 V (205). The Months and Their Abbreviations 
 
 The pupils should need little or no help in the 
 study of this lesson. After they have had time to 
 prepare it, have them write from dictation the names 
 of the months and their abbreviations. Preceding 
 the dictation, question them regarding the way these 
 are to be written ; that is, the use of capitals and 
 period. It would be well also to have some of the 
 more difficult names, such as February and August, 
 spelled orally. In dictating pronounce each name 
 very distinctly and have pupils pronounce it after 
 you before writing. 
 
 VI (206). Writing the Names of Holidays 
 
 Before the pupils write the sentences as they are 
 required to do, go over the lesson with them orally, 
 calling for sentences which tell the month in which 
 each holiday falls. Get as much variety as possible 
 in these sentences. Following are several different 
 and natural forms. 
 
 The first of January is New Year's Day. 
 Lincoln's Birthday comes in February. 
 Washington's Birthday is also a February holiday. 
 Labor Day comes early in September. 
 Christmas comes late in December. 
 
WRITING DATES 209 
 
 Variety in the oral sentences will prepare pupils 
 for writing varied sentences, which they should be 
 encouraged to do. Do not allow the abbreviations 
 of the names of the months in these sentences. Be- 
 fore they write, direct attention to the apostrophe in 
 the names of three of the holidays and ask why it is 
 used. 
 
 As always, the correction with the pupils of their 
 written work must be carefully done. Any errors in 
 writing the names of the holidays or of the months 
 the pupils should discover for themselves by compar- 
 ing their work with these names as they are given 
 in this and in the preceding lesson of their book. 
 
 VII (206). Writing Dates 
 
 Study the lesson with the children in preparation 
 for their copying of the dates as directed. Help 
 them to answer the question asked about the dates 
 1 73 2 ^ 1 775? an d 1776. See that they notice the 
 period after each complete date. If no question is 
 •raised, it will not be necessary to make any explana- 
 tion of this, simply requiring that it be copied cor- 
 rectly. Should there be now or in the later writing 
 of dates any indication that pupils think a period 
 belongs after the year of every date, it should be 
 explained that in dates written as these are, or in 
 the date at the beginning of a letter, each date is 
 really a sentence and is followed by a period simply 
 on that account. 
 
210 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 The names of the months are given in full in the 
 pupils' book, and they should be required to copy 
 them in full rather than to write the abbreviations. 
 This will fix the spelling, and it will prepare them 
 for the next use of dates that their work will re- 
 quire ; namely, in the writing of friendly letters, in 
 which the full name of the month is better form than 
 the abbreviation. In the dating of papers in all 
 school work have pupils use the abbreviations of the 
 months, and see that they write them correctly. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Have several dates written from dictation. 
 2. Dictate easy sentences containing dates. 
 
 VIII (207). My Birthday: Original Written Com- 
 position 
 
 This is the first time that purely original com- 
 position work has been required. While such work 
 might have been done much earlier, and probably 
 with a fair degree of success by most pupils, it has 
 been deferred until this time for the purpose of al- 
 lowing time and practice to fix as habits some of the 
 most common conventional forms before requiring 
 the pupil to do work in which he should be free to 
 devote his attention and thought mainly to the con- 
 tent rather than the form. 
 
 This exercise will prepare pupils somewhat for 
 the writing of friendly letters, a subject which will 
 soon be taken up. 
 
ORIGINAL WRITTEN COMPOSITION 211 
 
 Have no class discussion of the exercise — this 
 will tend to produce sameness and monotony rather 
 than originality and variety in the pupils' work — 
 but go from desk to desk, as pupils think and write, 
 and help individually by questions and suggestions 
 adapted to each one. The chief thing to impress 
 upon each one is that he write something that will 
 be really interesting 
 
 Perhaps some children will have great difficulty 
 in making a beginning. Such might be questioned 
 somewhat as follows : 
 
 When is your birthday? 
 
 What would you like best to do at that time? 
 
 (The season will determine many things that can be done to 
 best advantage.) 
 
 Is there any place you would like to visit? 
 
 Whom would'you like to go with you? 
 
 What would you do there? 
 
 What would you like for birthday presents ? 
 
 If you had some money given you for a birthday present, how 
 would you spend it? 
 
 Would you like to have a birthday party? Where would you 
 like to hold it? Whom would you invite? What would you do 
 to entertain your guests ? 
 
 Such questions as these and many others that 
 will suggest themselves cannot fail to start any 
 child thinking. But perhaps this will not always 
 be sufficient; perhaps with the mind full of inter- 
 esting things to write, some children's difficulty may 
 consist in the actual putting on paper of the first 
 
212 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 sentences. Do not hesitate to give such just the 
 help and all the help they need. This is much 
 better than scolding or prodding or leaving them to 
 flounder helpless and discouraged and finally mark- 
 ing their exercise a failure. A failure under such 
 conditions should be charged up to the teacher 
 rather than to the pupil. 
 
 Helping a pupil in the condition described to 
 make a beginning will often suffice to turn an im- 
 minent failure into a decided success. Perhaps the 
 beginning needed is as simple as this: 
 
 My birthday comes on March 16. If I could do just as I 
 would like on that day, I would — 
 
 IX (208). How the Months Were Named: a Study and 
 "Writing Exercise 
 
 This is a lesson for you to talk over with the 
 pupils, explain to them, and make as interesting as 
 possible. It is not at all necessary that pupils 
 commit to memory by formal study the sources of 
 the months' names nor the Indians' way of des- 
 ignating months or "moons." The lesson will 
 serve to build up about the names of the months 
 interesting associations, which the pupil may use 
 in speech or writing on occasion. Should he forget 
 some of the facts here given him, he will know 
 where to turn for them. 
 
MEMORIZING QUOTATIONS 213 
 
 X (210). A Written Exercise on the Months 
 
 The written work required of pupils should be 
 discussed and corrected with them individually, so 
 far as possible while they write. 
 
 XI (210). Study of Quotations about the Months 
 
 The quotations given for the different months 
 have been selected with great care. Each one is 
 especially appropriate; it not only expresses the 
 most characteristic associations of the month to 
 which it refers, but it awakens as well intimate 
 feelings to which that month's experiences have 
 given birth. To realize the full worth of these 
 selections they must be read — read intimately, 
 deeply, sympathetically, expressively, effectively. 
 
 Read them over and over with the children, try- 
 ing with each reading to bring out more and more 
 of the meaning. As an aid to the reading, study 
 the selections as the questions in the pupils' book 
 suggest. Several lesson periods may be profitably 
 devoted to this chapter. 
 
 XII (217). Memorizing Quotations 
 
 Before the pupils begin studying the quotations 
 to memorize them, find out which one each has 
 chosen to memorize. See that every quotation is 
 taken by at least one pupil. Have each pupil read 
 his chosen quotation aloud to you, so that you can 
 
214 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 determine whether he fully appreciates its meaning 
 and feeling. Read it to him if necessary. 
 
 Keep these quotations in review by calling for a 
 repetition of them from time to time. Call for them 
 by months, having some pupil respond who has 
 learned the quotation for the month called. If the 
 quotations are well rendered at each exercise of this 
 kind, in a surprisingly short time you will find that 
 most of the pupils can repeat most of the quotations. 
 They may vie with each other in the number they 
 can repeat. 
 
 It will be worth while to have each pupil write 
 from memory one or more of these quotations each 
 month. Keep each child's papers together and 
 toward the end of the year or term let him make 
 them into a booklet. He might illustrate each 
 poem and decorate the booklet cover. 
 
 XIII (218). Picture Stories 
 
 (Dead fawn picture, p. 219) 
 
 Some children in one class worked with enthusi- 
 asm for several weeks on stories growing out of this 
 picture. According to their conceptions, the pet 
 fawn belongs to the little princess. One day she 
 and her brother find the fawn dead. From the 
 mark on the arrow, they know that the king's 
 huntsman has killed the fawn. The huntsman is 
 brought before the king and confesses that he killed 
 the fawn, thinking it a wild one. The king gives 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 215 
 
 him one year in which to search the world and find 
 a fawn, exactly like the one killed — the same age, 
 size, color, with the same number of spots placed 
 in the same way — in everything exactly like. If 
 within that time the huntsman returns with such 
 a fawn, he will be pardoned ; if he fails, he shall no 
 longer be the king's huntsman. 
 
 The children wrote on The Quest for the Fawn, 
 relating the huntsman's adventures, etc. 
 
 Here are other suggestions that may be helpful. 
 
 1. The castle is besieged by an army on the farther side; the 
 defenders within are starving ; the boy kills the deer ; he and his 
 sister manage to get it to the starving ones in the castle, among 
 whom is the children's father, and so save their lives. 
 
 2. The boy kills his sister's fawn by accident; he is moved 
 by the sufferings of the dying creature ; he throws away his bow 
 and arrows (he no longer carries them in the picture) and 
 promises never again to harm an innocent creature. 
 
 3. Fawn shot by hunters escapes and falls wounded near 
 children's home ; children care for it, restore it, and keep it as 
 a pet. 
 
 XIV (220). More Picture Stories 
 
 (Girl in wood surrounded by animals, p. 221) 
 
 The different names given to the picture in the 
 children's book suggest different stories. Encour- 
 age the children to think of other suitable names. 
 Write their suggestions on the blackboard. Then 
 let each one select a title either from the list on the 
 board or from that in the book and write a story 
 appropriate to the title. 
 
216 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 Let the children imagine themselves any one of the 
 characters in the picture — the maiden, the youth, 
 the wolf, the deer, etc. — and write a story as that 
 character might tell it. The marked and contrast- 
 ing characteristics of the animals — the savageness 
 of the wolf, the timidity of the deer and hare, the 
 sauciness of the squirrel — and the common effect on 
 these of the maiden's kindness must be appreciated. 
 This appreciation will give variety to the stories as 
 told from the different standpoints of the various 
 characters. 
 
 Before the children are asked to write, the natural 
 characteristics of the several animals should be dis- 
 cussed with them in some detail. Then each one 
 should be allowed to choose the character that he 
 will be, and to write his story. 
 
 XV (220). Review of the Uses of Capitals and 
 Punctuation Marks 
 
 After the pupils have studied the lesson alone, 
 test them by asking them to read aloud certain 
 sentences and to give the reasons for the use of 
 capitals and marks of punctuation. 
 
 XVI (223). Studied Dictation 
 
 Have children write from dictation Part I of the 
 story, A Queer Catch, first taking such precautions 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 217 
 
 as may seem necessary to help them avoid the mak- 
 ing of errors. (See p. 206.) 
 
 Correct the papers carefully with the children, as 
 suggested in past exercises. Keep the papers until 
 after the next lesson, then put together the two papers 
 of each pupil. 
 
 XVII (223). Writing the Ending of a Story 
 
 As the children write, help any who need assist- 
 ance by asking suggestive questions. Be careful to 
 influence none who are able to work alone. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Let the children make complete stories based on 
 Exercise 8, Chapter Twelve, as suggested in this 
 Manual (p. 266). 
 
CHAPTER TEN 
 
 In addition to the continuation and development of all 
 important kinds of exercises previously taken up, this 
 chapter treats, in a concrete way that children understand, 
 the general use of marks of punctuation ; studies and 
 practices the use of the contractions don't and doesn't; and 
 gives exercises and instructions intended to eliminate the 
 use of ain't. 
 
 Before taking up the chapter with the children, 
 study its contents carefully, both in the children's 
 book and in this Manual, and compare with preced- 
 ing work so as to see just what advance is here 
 made. 
 
 I (224). "For the King" 
 
 Help the children to read themselves into the 
 very heart and spirit of the story. See and feel 
 yourself, as though you were a part of it, that scene 
 in the little Scottish cottage. Feel with those two 
 brave boys, as they prepare their arms, hoping to 
 conceal from their mother their real purpose, but 
 too honest and obedient positively to deceive her; 
 become that mother for a moment, the personifica- 
 tion of patriotism, courage, and self-sacrifice ; enter 
 the cottage with the homeless, wandering, hunted 
 king, and feel with him the rebound of limitless 
 
 218 
 
STUDYING THE STORY 
 
 219 
 
 courage as he experiences the perfect loyalty of the 
 mother and her sons. 
 
 If you can live the scene that this story describes 
 so vividly, you will have no difficulty with the chil- 
 dren. Whether you read it to them or with them, 
 or whether they read it to you, they will catch the 
 spirit. That is the purpose of the reading. Fail- 
 ing in this, the story is not read. Succeeding in 
 this, the dramatization of it, which is called for 
 later, will be spontaneous. 
 
 II (227). Studying the Story 
 
 If the story has been really read, which was the 
 purpose of the last lesson, the children will now 
 study it with enthusiasm, with keen appreciation 
 of the meaning of questions and suggestions given 
 in their book to direct their preparation for the 
 dramatizing. Give them some time to study by 
 themselves; observe them individually to determine 
 who really are studying sympathetically and who, 
 if any, only perfunctorily. Help them, particularly 
 those most in need of help, by calling on them to 
 answer some of the questions aloud and to show 
 how some of the characters spoke and acted, as 
 suggested in the pupils' book. 
 
 Let each child tell the part he would like to take. 
 Write on the blackboard the names of the several 
 characters and opposite each the names of the 
 children who want to take that part. 
 
220 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Discuss tactfully with the children the fitness of 
 the assignments. This will help them to appre- 
 ciate the requirements of the different parts. 
 
 Ill (230). Dramatizing the Story 
 
 Let the children determine largely the assignment 
 of parts for dramatizing, but see to it that the less 
 capable ones have their fair share of opportunity. 
 Seldom make up an "all star" cast. For the first 
 dramatization, usually give the leading roles to the 
 more capable children, the minor roles to the less 
 capable, the diffident. But do not hesitate, in sub- 
 sequent dramatizations of the same story, to assign 
 less capable children to leading parts ; this may be 
 just what they need to bring out unsuspected talent 
 or to overcome their self-consciousness. Let each 
 child try the part that he thinks himself he can take 
 best. 
 
 All the stories dramatized from the beginning 
 should be repeated from time to time, always with 
 different or partially different casts, so that every 
 child may at some time have a part in every drama- 
 tization. See to it that no child always, or nearly 
 always, takes part in the same dramatization. If 
 for any reason — as the small number in the class — 
 the same children must frequently take part in the 
 same play, change the assignment of parts. 
 
 This constant change of actors and parts helps to 
 make each dramatization spontaneous, original. A 
 
WHY MARKS OF PUNCTUATION ARE USED 221 
 
 routine, mechanical dramatization, with " finished " 
 acting and conversation, no matter how good it may- 
 be from the dramatic standpoint, is just what is not 
 wanted. 
 
 Occasionally, instead of the complete dramatiza- 
 tion of a story, have the story read expressively by 
 the several characters, each one reading only the 
 conversation of his part. 
 
 IV (230). Oral Reproduction of the Story 
 
 The results of the reading, study, and dramatizing 
 of the story should show in the reproduction of it. 
 See that the children tell it vividly and with feeling. 
 The action is straightforward ; the children's render- 
 ing should be the same. 
 
 V (231). Why Marks of Punctuation Are Used 
 
 This lesson is designed to make clear and 
 emphatic the idea that every mark of punctuation 
 has a definite purpose, that it must be both used 
 and interpreted thoughtfully. Carelessness in the 
 use of punctuation marks, or their omission alto- 
 gether, may do just as much harm as carelessness in 
 the use of words — or even the omission of words. 
 Punctuation marks are a part of written or printed 
 language. They, together with letters and words, 
 are the means we use in expressing thoughts on 
 paper. They must not be omitted where needed, 
 nor must they be placed where not needed. 
 
222 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 This is the simple idea that every child must get 
 and assimilate. Two people must use marks of 
 punctuation correctly, the writer and the reader. I 
 am always the one or the other of these people. As 
 a writer, I must use marks of punctuation so that 
 any reader can understand just what I mean. As 
 a reader, I must heed marks of punctuation so that 
 I can understand jtist what the writer means. 
 
 This idea every child should get from this lesson. 
 The full assimilation of it, until it becomes a habit, 
 will depend upon the consistency of its observance, 
 both in writing and in reading. And its observance, 
 with most children, will depend upon the teacher. 
 It requires patience, unremitting vigilance through 
 several years, but the results are just as sure as are 
 the results of spasmodic attention, carelessness, and 
 indifference. With patience and vigilance in this 
 matter, from the beginning, every pupil will complete 
 the elementary school course habitually thoughtful 
 in the use and observance, as writer and reader, of 
 marks of punctuation ; without such patience and 
 vigilance on the part of the teacher — every teacher 
 — only the opposite result can be expected. 
 
 Do not make the mistake of thinking that the 
 result scarcely justifies the effort. There is no 
 better means of training in accurate thinking than 
 that afforded by the process of acquiring the habit 
 of using and observing marks of punctuation cor- 
 rectly; this demands the constant exercise of dis- 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 223 
 
 criminating thought. So, in acquiring this habit, 
 children are doing much more than at first appears ; 
 they are learning to think definitely. Here is the 
 secret of the difficulty with punctuation — for adults 
 hardly less than for children ; punctuation depends 
 upon thought — -definite, discriminating thought. 
 Carelessness in the use and observance of punctua- 
 tion marks is almost conclusive evidence of careless- 
 ness and indefiniteness in thinking. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Dictate without study the following sentences: 
 
 "Will," asked Bob, " is this your hat?" 
 Will asked, " Bob, is this your hat?" 
 Will asked Bob, " Is this your hat?" 
 
 Have a child write these sentences on the black- 
 board as you dictate. Children at their seats will 
 criticize ; corrections should be made at once. 
 
 Be careful that your dictation demands the punc- 
 tuation that, you expect. If the children have dif- 
 ficulty in determining the punctuation, or if they 
 punctuate incorrectly, do not tell them, but make 
 them think for themselves what it should be. You 
 can do this by repetition, exaggeration, and contrast. 
 Similarly, make them see the errors in an incorrectly 
 punctuated sentence by reading, or having them 
 read, the sentence just as punctuated, and comparing 
 that with the reading originally given. 
 
224 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 2. Dictate similar sentences to be written on 
 paper. Correct them individually. Let each child 
 read to you just what he has written; whether he 
 has written according to dictation or not, his render- 
 ing should agree with his writing. 
 
 VI (233). A Fable to Study and Copy 
 
 This lesson is to be studied by the children alone 
 — without preceding class exercise. Before they 
 begin, make sure that they understand what they are 
 to do: (1) to read the fable carefully; (2) to study 
 what follows ; (3) to copy the fable as directed. 
 
 While they are copying, go from desk to desk, 
 making sure that they are copying accurately. 
 From time to time ask a question, as, " Why have 
 you used a comma here ? " to assure yourself that 
 the pupils are working intelligently. Especially 
 question them about the new point, the writing of 
 the contraction dorit. 
 
 Exclamatory sentences and contractions will re- 
 ceive more attention later. 
 
 VII (234). Writing a Fable from Dictation 
 
 Dictate the fable, The Fox and the Grapes, 
 Have pupils correct their own mistakes individually 
 under your direction. 
 
 As this fable is to be used as a model on which 
 children will base original fables, they must learn 
 the form of it thoroughly. 
 
TELLING ORIGINAL FABLES 225 
 
 VIII (234). Telling Original Fables 
 
 Study this lesson with the pupils. Make sure 
 that they fully understand the nature of the out- 
 lines, their relation to the stories based upon them. 
 The first outline — that analyzed out of the fable, 
 The Fox and the Grapes — is general ; it may 
 serve as the basis of many fables entirely differ- 
 ent in their character and details. The second 
 and third outlines are like the first, really based 
 on it, only they are specific, each one the basis 
 of a single story, which may be varied, indeed, 
 in its minor details, but which must concern the 
 actors named. 
 
 In working out the first original fable with the 
 children, that of the Girl and the Rose, do not let 
 them be satisfied with the one version given, as a 
 suggestion of form, in their book, but encourage 
 originality and variety in every one of the four 
 parts, especially in the last three. For examples: 
 How did the girl try to get the rose and fail ? 
 (She jumped and jumped ; she tried to pull down 
 the bush and scratched her hands ; she climbed on 
 the wall and fell.) What disagreeable thing did 
 she say about the rose ? (" It isn't fragrant ; " " it 
 is withered ; " " it has too many thorns ; " "I don't 
 like red (or white, or yellow) roses anyway ; " " it's 
 too small ; " "I didn't really want it.") 
 
 Allow the children a few minutes to think out a 
 
226 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 fable, each one for himself, choosing any of the 
 titles given in their book. Then have several tell 
 their fables to the class. Insist on their following 
 the outline, making just four parts of each fable, 
 each part definite and to the point. Discourage 
 random, irrelevant talking. Insist on brevity, point, 
 fluency, and good expression. Every fable must 
 teach the same moral — "sour grapes." 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Have pupils make lists of titles for fables that 
 may be made to teach the same lesson as that of 
 the Fox and the Grapes, This may be a class 
 exercise in which the titles, as determined upon, 
 may be written on the blackboard ; or it may be an 
 individual exercise, each pupil writing his own 
 titles on paper. 
 
 2. Fables may be made and told from any of 
 these titles, as in the regular lesson. 
 
 IX (236). Writing Original Fables 
 
 If the oral work of previous lessons has been well 
 done, the children should have no difficulty in writ- 
 ing good original fables. Before they begin, it will 
 be well to make sure by a few questions that every 
 one has in mind the several indispensable character- 
 istics which his fable must have ; namely, four parts 
 like the fable of the Fox and the Grapes, brevity and 
 directness, and a moral. Of course it must also be 
 
CONTRACTIONS, DON'T, DOESN'T 227 
 
 correctly written in respect to spelling, punctuation, 
 the use of capitals, and a paragraph for each part. 
 
 Go from pupil to pupil as they write to see that 
 each one is succeeding. A question or suggestion 
 will help a pupil to avoid an error or to correct it at 
 once. Some children will need a little sympathetic 
 help. Let the child who is unable to begin tell you 
 the first part of the fable that he is to write ; then 
 he will probably have no further trouble. Every 
 pupil should be helped to correct his own work — 
 not merely its form, but its content. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 Let children write original fables teaching the 
 lessons taught by fables 1 and 2, Chapter Twelve. 
 
 X (237). Contractions, Don't, Doesn't 
 
 Only contractions that are commonly misused by 
 children are made the objects of intensive study in 
 regular lessons. The lesson should be but the be- 
 ginning of a determined effort to establish right 
 habits of usage. In the lesson the child learns what 
 is right, why it is right, and how to tell what is 
 right. If he can be made to apply this knowledge 
 patiently to his speech and writing, he will soon 
 form the correct habit. 
 
 As an aid to the children in forming the habit of 
 using dorit and doesnt correctly, it would be well to 
 keep before them on the blackboard the lists of 
 
228 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 sentences in their book in which these words are 
 correctly used. Pupils especially prone to misuse 
 these words will do well to make individual copies 
 of these sentences on cards and refer to them 
 frequently. 
 
 Require each child to correct his own mistakes 
 in filling the blanks in The Family Vacation. 
 To do this, he has only to follow carefully the direc- 
 tions that his book clearly gives for the use of the 
 words dorit and doesn't. Additional exercises simi- 
 lar to this can easily be prepared if desired. 
 
 XI (238). A Contraction that is Always Wrong, Ain't 
 
 Owing to the widely prevalent use of this word 
 by children in speech, and, hardly less commonly, in 
 writing, a special lesson on the matter is advisable. 
 This lesson is not given with the thought that a 
 single lesson will break the habit in a single child ; 
 it should rather be considered the first step in a de- 
 termined effort which is to endure until the habit is 
 broken, until correct forms are used habitually, with- 
 out thought, in place of this incorrect form. 
 
 The lesson should serve to make perfectly plain 
 to every child that airit is wrong and must not be 
 used, that it is not needed, as there are other con- 
 tractions to fit every place in which any one would 
 think of using airit. More than this — and more 
 important — the lesson should be made to arouse a 
 strong sentiment against the use of the word and in 
 
THE EXCLAMATION MARK 229 
 
 favor of using correct forms ; if this can be done, it 
 will need only following up to replace the wrong 
 habit with correct ones. 
 
 As suggested in the last lesson concerning dorit 
 and doesrit it will help to have the correct forms, as 
 given in the pupils' book (p. 239), on the board where 
 reference can be made to them as necessary. It will 
 also help some pupils to have their individual copies. 
 
 If your children are unfortunately afflicted with 
 the hairit as well as the airit habit, — perhaps using 
 hain't interchangeably with airit, or as a contraction 
 of have not and has not, — try to eradicate both hab- 
 its at once and by similar methods. 
 
 XII (240). The Exclamation Mark 
 
 After the pupils have studied the lesson by them- 
 selves, have them read appropriately The Circus 
 Parade and tell why each exclamation mark is used, 
 like this: "There is an exclamation mark after 
 Here it comes because these words express strong 
 feeling — Harry's excitement; there is an exclama- 
 tion mark after What funny little monkeys because 
 these words express a strong or sudden feeling — 
 Will's interest and amusement." 
 
 Insist that pupils read these expressions in a way 
 to call for exclamation marks. Show them that 
 they are not really reading what Harry, Tom, and 
 the other boys said unless they read as the exclama- 
 tion marks direct. 
 
230 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Following this exercise, dictate The Circus Parade. 
 Do not fail to exemplify your own teaching. So 
 dictate that the thoughtful pupil can hardly fail to 
 place exclamation marks where they belong. If you 
 fail to exclaim in dictating, pupils ought not to use 
 exclamation marks in writing from your dictation. 
 
 Have pupils correct their papers at once under 
 your direction. Particular attention is to be paid, 
 of course, to the use of the exclamation mark; but 
 any errors in the use of other marks or of capitals or 
 spelling should also be corrected. 
 
 XIII (242). Writing Exclamations 
 
 As a result of the last lesson, the pupils should 
 be able to write the exclamations of the people 
 without aid, but it would be well to talk with them 
 about the orders that officers give their men, before 
 they attempt to write these. Let the children give 
 such orders as they have heard or know. A few of 
 these might be written on the board, as : Halt ! 
 Mark time, march ! Forward, march ! 
 
 Pupils' papers should be corrected at once. 
 
 XIV (242). Picture Stories 
 
 Take a lesson period to interest the children in 
 one of the books mentioned in their book ; read or 
 tell them interesting extracts; encourage them to 
 read the book. 
 
 The picture stories may be written as adventures 
 
"THE DUMB SOLDIER " 231 
 
 or merely as dreams. A story from the first picture 
 might follow an outline something like this: 
 
 Boy at seashore has been in swimming, rests for a while on 
 warm sand, thinks of fish who swim so much better than he, wishes 
 he could swim like a fish, wonders how they live, longs to see ; 
 fish calls, " Swim out to me and I will show you the wonders of 
 the deep;" boy's experiences with the fish; wakes up on beach. 
 
 Following are suggestions of two stories that 
 might be made from the second picture : 
 
 1. Boy wakened very early in the morning by the screams 
 of sea gulls, runs out on beach, watches gulls fly, thinks of all the 
 strange places they see, wishes he were a sea gull, one gull invites 
 the boy to go with him, his experiences, finally while crossing 
 water gull shakes him orT. Oh, how cold the water is ! Boy wakes 
 up to find the tide has come up and wet him. 
 
 2. Boy finds wounded gull on beach, cares for it, it is a fairy 
 gull, every night after boy is in bed gull taps at window, boy 
 opens window and seats himself on gull's back — gull has power 
 to make himself big — and away they journey till the morning 
 dawns. 
 
 XV (244). "The Dumb Soldier" 
 
 Read and discuss the poem with the children. 
 A few words and expressions will probably need 
 explanation. But the chief purpose of the reading 
 and discussion should be to arouse the children's 
 imaginations and sympathies, so that they will see 
 and hear and feel with the little boy and with his 
 soldier that he hides in the ground. 
 
 Following are the words and expressions most 
 likely to need explanation and illustration. Are 
 there others that your children may not understand ? 
 
232 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Second stanza : First line, apace; try to have children see 
 the beauty of the picture of grasses growing and spreading so 
 rapidly (apace) that they quickly run over the lawn like a green 
 sea, covering the soldier's hiding place and rising like a wave to 
 the boy's knee. 
 
 Third stanza : Probably the soldier was of lead, hence the 
 leaden eyes ; leaden may also refer to the color and the expression, 
 or lack of expression, or feeling. Scarlet coat and pointed gun 
 marks him a British foot soldier. 
 
 Fourth stanza : When the grass is ripe, ready to cut, the scythe 
 sharpened (stoned) and the lawn mown close, then the hole, the 
 soldier's hiding place, will be uncovered, so that it can be easily 
 found. 
 
 The last five stanzas make especial appeal to the imagination 
 and the feelings. The little boy had hidden his soldier in the 
 ground not through cruelty or lack of feeling, but that the soldier 
 might have the delightful experiences that the boy would fain 
 have enjoyed himself. Doubtless the thought of his soldier in the 
 ground stimulated the wonderful imagination of the boy so that he 
 could almost feel that he was enjoying the soldier's experiences. 
 Perhaps he often thought or said to himself, " Now my soldier is 
 seeing this ; now he is hearing that." 
 
 He is fully confident that he shall find his soldier again quite 
 safe, after "all that's gone and come." When he finds him, will 
 he pity the poor soldier because he has had to lie alone in a hole 
 in the ground all the spring and summer? Not a bit of it. He'll 
 envy him because he has lived just as the boy would have lived, 
 has done just as the boy would have done, if he could (sixth 
 stanza) ; he'll envy him because he has seen (seventh stanza) and 
 heard (eighth stanza) what the boy so much wanted to see and hear. 
 
 Read to the children two other poems by Steven- 
 son, Bed hi Summer, and The Land of Storybooks. 
 In these poems he expresses similar intense delight 
 
 
"THE DUMB SOLDIER" 233 
 
 in living close to the life of nature and in the en- 
 chanted realms of the imagination ; he also gives 
 expression to similar grief when he is deprived of 
 these opportunities. 
 
 And does it not seem hard to you, 
 When all the sky is clear and blue, 
 And I should like so much to play, 
 To have to go to bed by day ? 
 
 — Last stanza of Bed in Summer. 
 
 So, when my nurse comes in for me, 
 Home I return across the sea, 
 And go to bed with backward looks 
 At my dear Land of Storybooks. 
 
 — Last stanza of The Land of Storybooks. 
 
 Study with the pupils the questions in their book. 
 Let them talk of the "fairy things." Were they 
 real fairies? Did they dance by the light of the 
 stars ? Did they climb the blades of grass and 
 slide down them ? Did they touch the soldier and 
 make him live and play with them ? When the sun 
 came, did they fly back to fairyland ? 
 
 Or were the " fairy things " little insects that lived 
 in the grass and crawled about and over the. dumb 
 soldier ? 
 
 Of what were the bee and the ladybird talking ? 
 Did the bee say: 
 
 " Ladybird, ladybird, fly away home ; 
 
 Your house is on fire, your children will burn " ? 
 
234 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 What answer did ladybird make ? Or were the 
 bee, the ladybird, and the butterfly going to the fairy 
 ball ? Or did the bee tell the others of all the honey 
 he had gathered and stored away for the winter, and 
 did he tell them to stop playing and go to work, 
 too? 
 
 After the children have talked freely over all such 
 possibilities as those above suggested help them to 
 tell the soldier s story. 
 
 XVI (248). "The Lost Doll" 
 
 Read this poem with the children and help them 
 to compare it with The Dumb Soldier. 
 
 How did the dolls experiences compare with 
 those of the soldier ? 
 
 How did the feelings of the girl, as she thought 
 of her doll out on the heath, compare with the feel- 
 ings of the boy as he thought of his soldier in the 
 ground ? 
 
 How did the feelings of the girl as she found her 
 doll compare with those of the boy when he found 
 his soldier ? 
 
 Let the children speculate on the terrible ex- 
 periences of the poor lost doll as she lay helpless 
 on the heath, the cows trampling over and mangling 
 her, and the rain beating down on her and washing 
 away her paint and her curls. Let the girls tell the 
 doll's story, how she was lost, what happened to her, 
 and how she was found. 
 
WRITING TRUE STORIES 235 
 
 XVII (249). Writing the Stories of the Dumb Soldier 
 and the Lost Doll 
 
 As suggested in previous exercises in writing 
 original stories, help the children as they write. 
 Let them correct any errors at once. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Let pupils write stories based (1) on Exercise 6, 
 Chapter Twelve, as suggested in the Manual, p. 265, 
 (4); and (2) on Exercise 11, same chapter, as sug- 
 gested in the Manual, p. 268, (2). 
 
 XVIII (250). Writing True Stories 
 
 Do not discuss these topics with the children as 
 a class before they write ; that would tend to destroy 
 the originality and individuality of their papers. 
 Encourage each one to write his own story, which 
 he may read to the class if it is good enough ; let it 
 be a " surprise story " if possible. 
 
 While children write, pass from seat to seat help- 
 ing individuals according to each one's need. Some 
 are perhaps finding it difficult to begin : one does 
 not quite understand what is required ; another can- 
 not decide on the word to write first ; a third cannot 
 bring himself to choose between the subjects sug- 
 gested. Start each one by just the question or 
 suggestion that fits his particular need. 
 
 If a few need more help, as they may, to develop 
 
22,6 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 and arrange their thought, give this help largely 
 through suggestive questions. Require the child to 
 answer in complete sentences. Question in such 
 order that the answers, written down, will make a 
 complete and interesting story. 
 
 After papers are completed and corrected by the 
 children, with such help as you may find it necessary 
 to give, have some of them read and discussed. 
 Let the papers read be as different as possible. 
 They will suggest to the children ideas that they 
 might have used, ideas that they may use on some, 
 future occasion. 
 
 Several periods may be profitably spent on this 
 section. Some pupils may be able — and should be 
 encouraged — to write on two or more of the sug- 
 gested subjects, while others are working out and 
 perfecting a single story. 
 
CHAPTER ELEVEN 
 
 The work of this chapter calls for the use of all 
 the knowledge and power that have grown out of 
 all the previous work. All the various exercises of 
 previous chapters — reproductions, oral and written, 
 dramatizing, telling and writing original fables, 
 picture stories, poem study, the use of all ma/ks of 
 punctuation already studied — are continued with 
 new and interesting material ; increased demands 
 are made upon the children to exercise their grow- 
 ing power and independence, to express their in- 
 dividualities. 
 
 The distinctly new work of the chapter consists 
 of the following : 
 
 1. Making a story from an outline; oral and written ex- 
 ercises. 
 
 2. Letter writing. 
 
 I (251). Making a Story from an Outline 
 
 This is an oral lesson, the first one of the kind. 
 The work on original fables in the preceding chapter 
 has prepared the pupils for it. This goes a step 
 farther than the fable work in its demand for origi- 
 nality, for the use of the constructive imagination. 
 
 Study the whole lesson through with the children 
 so that they will understand clearly what is to be 
 
 237 
 
238 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 done, and that the scenes and events suggested by 
 the paragraph headings may begin to shape them- 
 selves in the children's minds into a connected 
 whole — which is to be expanded into a story. 
 Then help the children to work the story out and 
 to express it, paragraph by paragraph. Remember 
 that it is their imagination, thought, and expression 
 that are to be exercised, and that you are merely to 
 help. This does not mean that you need not ex- 
 ercise the same faculties. On the contrary, you 
 must at least equal the combined mental activities' 
 of all your children ; for you must be quick to ap- 
 preciate every mental picture, every idea, every ex- 
 pression that they suggest. 
 
 Paragraph I. Talk over this paragraph with the children until 
 every one has a vivid mental picture of the burning house, the 
 flames and smoke, the frightened people, the firemen with hose 
 and ladders thinking that, while the house is gone past their power 
 to save, every one who was in it is safe. Probably most children 
 have had experiences that can be drawn upon in building up the 
 desired mental picture. 
 
 Paragraphs II and III. These paragraphs, which should be 
 largely made up of exclamations, give excellent opportunity for 
 the children to apply what they learned in the last chapter about 
 exclamations and exclamation marks. 
 
 Get the children to give a large number of exclamations that 
 the child might use, and have a child, or children, write and 
 punctuate them correctly on the board. Some of these might be : 
 " O Mother ! Mother ! " — " Mother, help me !" — " Come quick, 
 Mother, I am burning ! " — " Help, Mother, help ! " — "Take me 
 down, take me down ! " 
 
MAKING A STORY FROM AN OUTLINE 239 
 
 In the same way have them give and write on the board the 
 excited and horrified cries of the people, the firemen, the mother 
 (if she is there ; perhaps she will not appear on the scene until the 
 fireman has tried in vain to rescue the child). 
 
 When a sufficient number of exclamatory expressions have been 
 secured, have the children select the few that they will use in 
 each paragraph and give these their proper setting with a few ex- 
 planatory words. 
 
 Paragraph IV. This paragraph must paint a most vivid picture, 
 must convey the tense excitement of the crowd, the desperate 
 efforts of the fireman ; there will be smoke and flame ; perhaps a 
 tottering ladder and crashing timbers ; a fireman badly burned 
 and almost suffocated ; perhaps the fireman cries out his failure : 
 " It's no use ! The child can't be saved ! " 
 
 Paragraph V. What does the mother cry out as she rushes into 
 the burning building? What are the cries of the onlookers? Get 
 a large number and have them written on the board as before. 
 Then select a few and make into a paragraph. 
 
 Paragraph VI. Is the mother burned? Is the baby saved and 
 unharmed ? What is said and done ? Work for a good sentence 
 to end the story. 
 
 Well handled, pupils can hardly fail to get into 
 the spirit of the exercise, to become filled with clear 
 thoughts, vivid pictures, strong feelings that they 
 want to express; this is the first requisite in speak- 
 ing or writing — something to express. The second 
 requisite is effective expression. This you have 
 been working out with the children, paragraph by 
 paragraph. It is now time to begin at the begin- 
 ning and tell the whole story connectedly. Let the 
 teacher do this first, varying at will the expressions 
 and exclamations already discussed, but being care- 
 
240 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 ful to make a concise, well-connected story. Fol- 
 lowing the teacher, let several pupils tell the story. 
 Encourage originality, variation in detail, only have 
 the outline followed. Also insist on brevity. 
 
 II (252). Writing a Story from an Outline 
 
 As pupils write the story they should keep their 
 books open before them at the outline given in the 
 previous lesson, and write paragraph by paragraph. 
 Give your undivided attention to the children, pass- 
 ing from one to another to see that every one is 
 working intelligently, and to give a bit of help, by 
 question or suggestion, where needed. 
 
 Keep constantly before them the idea that they 
 must think just what they are going to write, word for 
 word, before they begin a sentence. Ask individual 
 pupils frequently to tell you just what they are going 
 to write in a given sentence and in a given paragraph. 
 Encourage them to whisper or even to speak softly 
 to themselves the words they are to use if they find 
 that this helps them to think clearly. 
 
 Do not hurry the children. Some will think and 
 write much more readily and quickly than others; 
 do not hold these up as examples, as standards that 
 all should reach. It often happens that the results 
 of these rapid workers are poor or mediocre. What 
 needs most to be emphasized is careful thought. 
 Dawdling must not be tolerated; but every one — 
 the slow as well as the quick thinker — should be 
 
WRITING A STORY FROM AN OUTLINE 241 
 
 encouraged to take the time that he needs to think 
 out to his own satisfaction what he wishes to write. 
 Pupils who cannot finish their stories in a single 
 period should put aside their papers and continue it 
 at a second or even, if necessary, a third period. 
 The object is not the completion of the exercise, 
 but the writing by the children of the best stories of 
 which they are capable. 
 
 Every child should succeed in this exercise; 
 every child should complete a connected story. 
 The child's future work depends upon his success 
 or failure at this point. If he succeeds now, and 
 knows and feels that he succeeds, even though his 
 production may be poor in itself, he will advance to 
 the next step with courage and confidence and build 
 a second larger success on this first one. If he fails 
 now, if he is allowed to leave the exercise without 
 having completed a story, if he knows and feels that 
 he has failed, he has the whole weight of this failure, 
 in the shape of discouragement, dislike, and indiffer- 
 ence, to handicap whatever efforts you may induce 
 him to make in future. Always insist on success ; 
 never permit a failure. If anything like a failure 
 occurs, do not allow it to be left as a failure ; see 
 that it is buried under a success. 
 
 Correcting papers. 
 
 If you are active, as already suggested, while 
 pupils are writing, they can make most of the cor- 
 
242 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 rections necessary in their papers while they write. 
 You can anticipate most of their errors and then see 
 that they are corrected at the right time — before 
 they are actually made. 
 
 It will do little good — probably will do positive 
 harm — for you to correct pupils' papers alone, hand 
 them back to them, and require them to note the 
 errors and corrections, and perhaps to rewrite their 
 stories as corrected. Their greatest difficulty is in 
 thinking clearly, in deciding exactly what they are 
 going to say, and not primarily in the form of expres- 
 sion. True, confused thought or lack of thought 
 will reveal itself in the expression; but merely cor- 
 recting the expression on paper — with a child ten 
 years of age — will rarely help the child. You must 
 get back to his real difficulty, you must personally, 
 face to face with the child, make him think clearly ; 
 then he will write clearly. Correcting the child's 
 written errors will improve the particular production ; 
 helping the child to think will insure better produc- 
 tions in future. 
 
 Children cannot write this story from memory. 
 It was not the purpose of the oral lesson to enable 
 them to do this. The purpose of that lesson was to 
 prepare the pupils to think out the story, each one 
 for himself, before writing; to think out exactly 
 each sentence before beginning to write it. You 
 are anticipating — and so best correcting — the 
 errors that might later appear on their papers, when 
 
"THE KING'S DREAM" 243 
 
 you compel them to think before writing. Let the 
 child who is prone to err tell you exactly what he 
 proposes to write. Then let him answer to you 
 these questions: (1) Where are you going to begin 
 that paragraph ? (2) Why? (3) With what kind 
 of letter will you begin it? (4) Why? (5) What 
 
 mark will you place after ? When you come 
 
 around to that child again in a few moments, you 
 can see at a glance whether he has done what he 
 proposed to do. Probably his work will be cor- 
 rect ; if not, a question will make him think and 
 enable him to correct it. 
 
 Every moment of this patient, insistent, unremit- 
 ting, close-range, detailed, and individual work with 
 the children is being built into right habits of 
 thought and expression, just as truly as the general 
 effort to teach language to a class as a whole 
 fosters the growth of carelessness and indifference. 
 Individual pupils, not classes, learn to use language. 
 
 Ill (253). "The King's Dream" 
 
 In reading this story with the children, see that 
 the various feelings of the king and his wise men, 
 as well as the ideas, are adequately expressed. Let 
 the children read it as a dialogue. 
 
 After the children have studied by themselves the 
 questions on the story, ask them these and other 
 questions that will bring out the full meaning of the 
 story and prepare for its dramatization. 
 
244 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 IV (256). Dramatizing the Story 
 
 If the children have been allowed from the begin- 
 ning, as repeatedly directed, to assume more and 
 more responsibility and to take the initiative in- 
 creasingly in dramatizing, they should now be able 
 to plan and carry out the dramatization of a simple 
 story like this with very little help from the teacher. 
 The preparation which the last lesson gave ought 
 to enable them to try it with confidence. 
 
 To stimulate a little wholesome rivalry, divide 
 your class into two groups. Let each group plan 
 the dramatization, assigning parts. Every child can 
 be used in some capacity, as soldier or wise man. 
 When the groups are ready, let one after the other 
 give the little play. Perhaps a few children will be 
 reserved for an impartial audience, who will dis- 
 cuss, at the close, the relative merits of the two 
 productions. 
 
 V (256). Oral Reproduction of the Story 
 
 Without further preparation the children should 
 be able to tell this story. Work for brief, fluent, 
 straightforward, thoughtful, expressive reproduc- 
 tions. A reproduction must not be allowed to de- 
 generate into a mere test of memory, even. largely 
 word memory. A reproduction, like an original 
 story, should be the result of active, discriminating 
 thought appropriately expressed. 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY WORK 245 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 i. Tell the children the story below, The Two 
 Doctors, which teaches the same lesson as The 
 Kings Dream. After a single telling let the chil- 
 dren dramatize, if possible without aid or sugges- 
 tion from you. Perhaps the same two groups that 
 dramatized The Kings Dream will take charge 
 of this dramatization in rivalry. 
 
 The Two Doctors 
 
 Once upon a time a king was ill. He sent for the wisest two 
 doctors in the land. They felt his pulse and looked at his tongue. 
 Then the first doctor spoke. 
 
 " O king," he said, " you do not exercise enough. You should 
 give up your carriage and walk, and you should play games or 
 work every day." 
 
 "What ! " cried the angry king, " give up my carriage ! Walk ! 
 Play games ! Work ! I will have none of your advice ! Leave 
 my court at once, and be thankful you take your head with you ! " 
 
 The second doctor said : " Your case is a very strange one, O 
 king. Let me study it until to-morrow. Then I will tell you 
 what must be done." 
 
 Next day the doctor returned. He gave the king a silver cup, 
 a spade with a golden handle, and a ball. 
 
 "O king," he said, "a mile from your palace is a spring of 
 magic water. Every morning before breakfast walk to this spring 
 and fill the silver cup from its waters and drink. The magic 
 water will soon make you well again. 
 
 " After breakfast take this magic spade and dig for one hour in 
 the fairy glen back of your palace garden. If you will do this for 
 one year, you will become very rich. 
 
 " In the afternoon take the ball I have given you (it is stuffed 
 with magic medicine) into the court and toss it one hundred times 
 
246 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 to one of your little pages. If you will do this, you will live for 
 many years." 
 
 " You are indeed a wise doctor," cried the king. " I will do all 
 you say, for you have promised me health, wealth, and long life. 
 As a small reward for your good advice, I will make you my doctor 
 for life and pay you a thousand pieces of gold every year." 
 
 — A Story from India. 
 
 2. Have the children reproduce the story, The 
 Two Doctors. 
 
 3. Let the children dramatize The Two Doctors. 
 They should need little or no aid. 
 
 VI (257). Dates 
 
 Study the questions about the dates with the 
 children. Make sure that every child understands 
 what the numbers mean, the number immediately 
 after the name of the month and the number of the 
 year. 
 
 As the pupils write their own dates, inspect their 
 work, and have them correct any errors at once. 
 Let them give reasons for any changes that they 
 have to make. 
 
 VII (258). Writing Dates from Dictation 
 
 Have the children write several dates from dicta- 
 tion, one or more in each month. Let them correct 
 their work at the time. Few mistakes should be 
 made. 
 
 This lesson is in preparation for letter writing. 
 
HOW TO WRITE A LETTER 247 
 
 VIII (258). How to Write a Letter 
 
 Before taking up this lesson with the children, read 
 the two following lessons in the pupils' book and in 
 this Manual, so that you may understand the full 
 plan of these first lessons in letter writing. Perhaps 
 a word of explanation will help you to appreciate 
 this plan still more, and so to carry it out more 
 effectively. 
 
 The first purpose — as in all language work — is 
 to arouse the pupils' interest, to stimulate their 
 thought about things that they know and like, to 
 make expression seem natural, desirable, and useful. 
 Hence the story involving a real child's letter, ex- 
 pressed in a child's language, and with childish en- 
 thusiasm, and filled with things that interest all 
 children. The letter is, of course, correct in form, 
 but the content — as in every letter worth while — 
 is more important than the form. The letter re- 
 quires, suggests an answer. Children feel at once 
 that they can, and so they want to reply to it. In 
 doing so they observe the form, not as the main pur- 
 pose of the letter, but merely as the form that a good 
 letter should have. In this way they are learning at 
 the outset the proper relation of form and content. 
 They are learning correct form much more surely 
 and easily than they could if their attention were 
 mainly directed to this, as is almost inevitably the 
 case when classic letters of well-known authors are 
 
248 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 used as models. The content of such letters, written 
 to or for children, not by them, is usually unreal, 
 unchildlike, lacking in power to arouse children's 
 interests and to stimulate their imagination. Hence, 
 the form receives undue emphasis, and children con- 
 ceive a distaste for letter writing. 
 
 Read the story with the children and take up with 
 them the study of the letter, following the questions 
 and explanations given in their book. 
 
 The address on the form of the envelope given 
 in the pupils' book (p. 258) is a type that the pupils 
 may copy. Study it with them, having them note 
 the four periods, the only marks used, all indicating 
 abbreviations. 
 
 The two forms of headings (p. 261) should also be 
 carefully studied with the pupils. Lead them to 
 notice all the marks of punctuation and to see the 
 reasons for each. 
 
 (Form I.) There is a comma to separate the 
 name of the town from the name of the state, and 
 another comma to separate the whole address from 
 the date. There are periods after N. J. because 
 N. /. is the abbreviation for New Jersey. 
 
 The writing of dates the children have already 
 learned. 
 
 All words in the heading begin with capitals; 
 they are all names. 
 
 (Form II.) This is the same as Form I except 
 the first and additional line. The comma separates 
 
LETTER WRITING 249 
 
 the name of the avenue or street from the name of 
 the city; the period after Ave. marks the abbrevia- 
 tion for Avenue. The name of the state, Michigan, 
 as in Form /, is abbreviated. The abbreviation, 
 Mich., has a period after it. 
 
 Pupils should be held to the strict observance 
 of the forms given in their book until they have 
 learned to write them without error. It will be 
 time for them to learn the variations of these 
 forms — variations mainly in punctuation and ab- 
 breviation — that are quite correct and in current 
 use, when they can write the given forms with 
 confidence. 
 
 Writing the Mechanical Forms 
 
 1. Have every pupil, some on the blackboards, 
 others on paper, write the correct heading of a let- 
 ter written from his own home. 
 
 2. Let pupils study the address on the envelope 
 of Dick's letter, then write the correct heading for 
 a letter written by Tom. 
 
 These exercises should be done quickly, in- 
 spected, and any necessary corrections made at 
 once by the pupils. 
 
 IX (262). Letter Writing {Continued) 
 
 Read over the story with the children. The 
 " thinking and wishing " of Tom is given in detail 
 to let the children see what things would naturally 
 be touched on in Tom's letter to Dick. These 
 
250 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 things are repeated again when Tom tells his 
 mother what he will write. 
 
 Keep referring to Dick's letter when Mother 
 refers Tom to it. Let the children look back and 
 answer for Tom. Have them tell exactly what 
 they will write ; as, the heading — 
 
 25 Walnut St., 
 
 Louisville, Ky., 
 
 May 11, 1912. 
 
 The next thing — 
 
 Dear Dick : 
 
 The first paragraph — 
 
 I will tell you how I got hurt. I was running to school, etc. — 
 
 The rest of the letter — 
 
 I thank you for your kind invitation to visit you. I am coming 
 as soon as I can travel. I want to know all about your pets. 
 Is Rover a big dog? Where do Mrs. White and her kittens 
 live ? etc. — 
 
 Have children tell individually just what each 
 will write. 
 
 Have several tell how they will end the letter, 
 as: 
 
 When I am strong I will show you what a fine swimmer and 
 diver I am. 
 
 Your loving cousin, 
 Tom. 
 
WRITING A LETTER TO A FRIEND 251 
 
 Next summer I will show you that there is no better swimmer 
 
 than 
 
 Your loving cousin, 
 
 Tom. 
 
 When my leg is strong again we will have a swimming match. 
 Your cousin, 
 Tom. 
 
 Have several good endings written on the black- 
 board. 
 
 X (264). Answering a Letter 
 
 You are to be Tom's mother. In the story she 
 prepared the way for a good letter. While the chil- 
 dren are writing, pass from desk to desk asking ques- 
 tions, making suggestions to see that the pupils are 
 really writing an interesting letter. There may not 
 be much variety in the letters, but they should all 
 be interesting and correct in form. Use the letter 
 Dick wrote as the type, referring the children back 
 to it for any needed corrections in form. 
 
 Have them write the address for the envelope 
 either on a real envelope or on a square or oblong- 
 drawn on the backs of their papers. Here they 
 should write Dick's full name — 
 
 Mr. Richard Brown 
 Harrisburg 
 III. 
 
 XI (265). Writing a Letter to a Friend 
 
 Have each pupil write a letter to a friend asking 
 the friend to spend next Saturday afternoon with 
 
252 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the writer. Each letter should tell just what the 
 writer wants to show the visitor, what they will play, 
 what they will do, etc. Talk over the proposed 
 letters with the children. Have them tell you just 
 what they are going to say. Do not let them write 
 a word till they know and have expressed orally just 
 what they want to say. A whole language period 
 might be well spent in this oral preparation for the 
 written letters. 
 
 When the pupils are ready to write, let them use 
 as a type the letter Dick wrote to Tom. Have each 
 child write to another child in the class — to a child 
 he would really like to have spend Saturday after- 
 noon with him. See that every. child has a letter 
 written to him. By questions and suggestions as 
 they write help them to avoid and to correct errors. 
 
 XII (265). Answering a Friend's Letter 
 
 Give the letters written in the last lesson to the 
 pupils to whom they are addressed. Let each child 
 answer his letter. 
 
 While they write, pass from seat to seat helping 
 them, as Tom's mother helped him, by questions 
 and suggestions, to make good replies. 
 
 XIII (265). A Fable to Study 
 
 This fable is a type after which pupils are to tell 
 and write other fables. In order that they may do 
 this intelligently and correctly, they must master 
 
MAKING NEW FABLES 253 
 
 the type — the mechanical form as well as the 
 story. 
 
 Have pupils tell orally just why each capital and 
 each mark of punctuation is used. For variety ask 
 questions as follows : 
 
 Which words in the title begin with capitals because they are 
 important words in the title ? What other word in the title begins 
 with a capital? Why? 
 
 How many paragraphs in this fable? How do you know? 
 
 In the first paragraph how many sentences are there? How 
 do you know? How many of these sentences are statements? 
 How do you know? 
 
 In the second paragraph how many sentences? What kind of 
 sentences are these? How do you know? Give two reasons why 
 " Dear " begins with a capital letter. Why is there a comma after 
 " Mrs. Crow"? What abbreviation is used in this fable? Read 
 the whole quotation in the second paragraph. 
 
 Why is the apostrophe used in "fox's"? Read the state- 
 ments in the third paragraph. What other kind of sentence is 
 used in this paragraph? Read it. 
 
 In the last paragraph why are commas used before and after 
 " Mrs. Crow " ? Where is there another comma in this para- 
 graph ? Why is it used ? Read the quotation in the last para- 
 graph. 
 
 XIV (266). Writing a Fable from Dictation 
 
 Dictate the fable, The Fox and the Crow. 
 Have pupils correct mistakes as usual under your 
 direction. 
 
 XV (266). Making New Fables 
 
 Study with the pupils the analysis of the fable of 
 The Fox and the Crow as given in their book. 
 
254 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Make sure that they clearly understand the content 
 and significance of each paragraph — its relation to 
 the complete fable. This perfect understanding is 
 the necessary basis of the original fables which they 
 are to make. 
 
 Discuss with the children the suggestions for the 
 new fables, having them complete the outlines, and 
 suggest a variety of ways in which the fables may 
 be worked out in each paragraph. 
 
 What does one animal say to the other to flatter 
 him and make him let go his prize ? The cat might 
 say to the kingfisher : " Let me hear your sweet 
 voice." — " How can you open your beak so wide ! " 
 — "I once saw a wonderful sight. A bird threw a 
 fish up in the air and caught it in her beak ! I be- 
 lieve you could do that!" — "What a big fish for 
 you to carry! But I believe you could carry a 
 larger one still. Just open your beak as wide as 
 you can ! " 
 
 What does the flatterer say at the end about the 
 folly of listening to flatterers? The wolf might say 
 to the bear: "Your teeth are sharper than your 
 wits." — " Strong teeth may catch a lamb, but only 
 good sense can keep it." — "Never listen to a 
 flatterer and you may keep your lamb as well as 
 catch it." 
 
 After the possibilities of the various suggested 
 fables have been revealed to the children by this 
 discussion, give them a few minutes for thought in 
 
WRITING A FABLE 255 
 
 which each one shall select the fable that he will 
 tell and think just how he will tell it. The fables 
 should be told briefly and fluently. Each should 
 be complete and pointed. The last fable suggested 
 might be something like this. 
 
 The Weasel and the Fox 
 
 One day a weasel stole a chicken and ran with it to the woods. 
 A fox saw the chicken and planned to get it. 
 
 " Why, Mr. Weasel," said the fox, " how did you ever catch 
 that chicken? How could you creep up so softly that it never 
 heard you? Please show me how you did it." 
 
 The weasel felt flattered. He dropped the chicken and crept 
 softly over the ground. "This is how I did it," he said. 
 
 When he turned around the fox was just swallowing the last of 
 the chicken. " How silly you are, Mr. Weasel ! " said the fox. 
 " You should know better than to listen to flatterers." 
 
 XVI (268). Writing a Fable 
 
 Pupils who choose to write from any of the out- 
 lines given in the last lesson should be able to do 
 so with little help, as those fables have already been 
 discussed and told orally. Any child who chooses 
 an original title, however, should have attention. 
 It will probably be well to have such a child at least 
 outline his story to you before he begins to write. 
 As pupils write encourage them to refer to the type 
 fable (p. 265) whenever they seem to need such 
 assistance as they can get from that fable. 
 
 In having papers corrected, pay attention not 
 
256 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 simply to mechanical errors, but especially to the 
 content — the character of the story and the moral 
 that it is intended to teach. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 1. Let children tell fables similar to those out- 
 lined in XV, but varying them by having the flat- 
 terer outwitted. Following are examples : 
 
 The crow may eat her cheese, then say, " Ah, Mr. Fox, I am 
 not so easily flattered. I know I cannot sing well." 
 
 The kingfisher may say, as he clutches the fish in his talons, 
 " Excuse me till I take this fish to my little ones ; then I will 
 gladly sing for you." 
 
 The bear may hold the lamb with a firm paw while he bares 
 his teeth. 
 
 The owl may hold the mouse in his talons while he answers 
 the cat. 
 
 After talking over with children various possible 
 endings of this kind, let them write fables with 
 similar endings. 
 
 2. Write the following titles on the board. Chil- 
 dren tell what the first-mentioned animal had, and 
 how the second secured or attempted to secure it. 
 
 The Hawk and the Cat 
 The Fox and the Wolf 
 The Hawk and the Eagle 
 The Goose and the Fox 
 The Cat and the Dog 
 
 3. Write the following titles on the board. 
 Pupils tell who tried to take the kid from the wolf, 
 
" AMERICA" 257 
 
 the mouse from the cat, etc. ; how he tried, and how 
 he succeeded. 
 
 The Wolf and the Kid 
 The Cat and the Mouse 
 The Mouse and the Cheese 
 The Robin and the Worm 
 The Dog and the Bone 
 
 4. Let pupils write original fables that teach the 
 lessons taught by fables 3 and 11, Chapter Twelve. 
 
 XVII (269). "America" 
 
 Before taking up the detailed study of the poem 
 with the children, read it to them — perhaps several 
 times — with expression and feeling. Read it so 
 that they will feel as well as understand its meaning ; 
 indeed, only by feeling can they fully understand it. 
 
 Then study it with them, line by line, and stanza 
 by stanza. You may need to give further explana- 
 tions and illustrations than those in the children's 
 book. For instance, foreign children may need to 
 be told that the author, Dr. Smith, was born in 
 America ; hence he wrote, " My native country," 
 etc. Even in this detailed study do not fail to rely 
 largely on expressive rendering for the conveyance 
 of the full meaning, which is often beyond ex- 
 planation. 
 
 When the children understand and appreciate the 
 meaning of the song, — as fully as they are capable 
 of understanding and appreciating it, — have them 
 
258 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 memorize it. If some already know it perfectly, let 
 those prepare to write it from memory — by study- 
 ing the capitals, the punctuation, and the arrange- 
 ments of stanzas and lines. 
 
 Require the children to stand whenever the 
 anthem is sung. This will do much to inspire, 
 to associate with it appropriate feelings of pride, 
 patriotism, and reverence. 
 
 Supplementary Work 
 
 Tell the children something of the author of 
 America. Tell them of the time and circumstance 
 of his writing the song. Read to them what Oliver 
 Wendell Holmes says of him in his poem, The 
 Boys. 
 
 XVIII (274). Writing "America" from Memory 
 
 This exercise may be given in regular language 
 periods, — it will probably require more than one 
 for most children, — or it may be done in study 
 periods as individual pupils have time for it. The 
 object is to have every child learn the hymn per- 
 fectly. No child has completed this lesson until 
 he can write the whole poem without error. And 
 every child should study it and write it until he 
 has thus mastered it. Only make the children feel 
 a pride in this achievement and it will soon be ac- 
 complished. 
 
MORE PICTURE STORIES 259 
 
 XIX (274). Picture Stories 
 
 (Child drifting in boat, p. 273) 
 
 The picture tells the story so clearly and fully 
 that children should be able to write it without help. 
 Have them correct their work as usual, not only for 
 form, but for content and effective presentation. 
 
 Supplementary "Work 
 
 i. Let the story be written from the standpoint 
 of the person in the boat, only the prow of which 
 shows in the picture at the right. 
 
 2. Have stories written from any of the pictures 
 in Chapters One to Five. These pictures have 
 served only for oral stories. 
 
 XX (274). More Picture Stories 
 
 (Animated toys, p. 275) 
 
 There are many stories of toys that talked and 
 acted like real folks when everybody was asleep. 
 Tell the children one or more of these stories — you 
 will find them in almost any book of fairy tales. 
 Two of the best are The Tin Soldier and The 
 Money Pig, by Hans Christian Andersen. 
 
 Now tell the children that many story-tellers have 
 written stories of toys who could live and act and 
 talk like real people from twelve at midnight until 
 they heard the first cock crow in the morning. 
 Then let them write the story this picture tells. 
 
CHAPTER TWELVE 
 
 The stories and rhymes given in Chapter Twelve 
 of the pupils' book may be used in a great variety 
 of ways. In general they will serve two purposes. 
 First, they may be used as needed in connection with 
 lessons in preceding chapters. They furnish further 
 opportunities, varied and interesting, for reproduc- 
 tions, conversations, dramatizations, written exercises, 
 of various kinds, and drill in all mechanical forms. 
 
 The second general purpose which this material 
 is designed to serve is that of reviewing and testing. 
 Comparisons will show that these twelve stories and 
 rhymes contain all the forms of punctuation and the 
 use of capitals, that have been taught in preceding 
 chapters, and no others. They also furnish the 
 basis for all kinds of exercises, oral and written, that 
 have been subjects of study. 
 
 The following suggestions for the use of this 
 material, both to supplement and to review and test 
 preceding work, though quite numerous, by no 
 means exhaust the possibilities. 
 
 I. Suggestions for Using the Stories and Rhymes 
 
 1 (276). The Proud Crow. 
 
 Several uses that may be made of this story : 
 1. To test pupils' knowledge of the use of the 
 
 260 
 
SUGGESTIONS FOR USING STORIES AND RHYMES 261 
 
 capital and period. In this case the story should be 
 written from dictation without previous study. 
 
 2. The story may be enlarged by supplying more 
 details. As a help to this exercise read the com- 
 plete story of the proud crow as given in Aisop's 
 Fables, or — if it is to be dramatized — as told in 
 the Aldine Second Reader. 
 
 3. After being enlarged or after the complete 
 story has been told or read, it may be dramatized. 
 
 4. This story may be made the basis of exercises 
 supplementing the work on quotations in any 
 chapter. 
 
 The children may write quotations on the board, 
 or on paper, telling what the crow said when he 
 found the feathers ; what he said to the other crows ; 
 what he said to the peacocks ; their answer ; what 
 the crows finally said to the proud crow. 
 
 The exercise, may be handled somewhat as follows 
 with good results. Have the pupils give orally the 
 complete sentence, as : 
 
 The crow said, " What fine feathers." 
 
 The teacher writes the sentence on the board, 
 omitting all marks of punctuation. 
 She then proceeds as follows : 
 
 Is any one speaking? Who? What does the crow say? Put 
 your hands around the words the crow speaks. What marks 
 should be placed where your hands are? (Put in the quotation 
 marks.) Read the quotation. Read the rest of the sentence.* 
 What mark shall I use to separate the quotation from the rest of 
 
262 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 the sentence? (Put the comma in the right place.) What maik 
 shall I put at the end of the sentence? Why? (End sentence 
 with a period.) 
 
 In a similar way the remaining quotations may 
 be written and studied. There is no way more 
 effective for giving children a real understanding of 
 quotations and the correct use of quotation marks. 
 
 Stories 2 and 4 (276). 
 
 These stories may be used in ways similar to 
 those just suggested. 
 
 3 (276). The First Fountain. 
 
 This story may be used (1) as a study lesson on 
 capitals, the period, and the question mark ; (2) as 
 a copying exercise ; (3) as a studied dictation ; (4) 
 as an unstudied dictation ; (5) for oral or written 
 reproduction. 
 
 Rhymes 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 (277-278). 
 
 These rhymes may be copied by the children ; or 
 they may be memorized and then written from 
 memory. 
 
 Rhyme 5 (277). In addition to the uses given 
 above, this rhyme forms the basis of a good drill in 
 questions and statements. Teacher dictates the 
 question : 
 
 "Where did an old woman live?" 
 
 Pupils write the question dictated. Then they 
 answer the question, first, aloud, so that the teacher 
 
SUGGESTIONS FOR USING STORIES AND RHYMES 263 
 
 may make sure that they answer with a complete 
 statement. Should a child say, "In a shoe," the 
 teacher asks, " Who lived in a shoe ? " or some other 
 question that will bring the complete statement, 
 " An old woman lived in a shoe." When a satis- 
 factory statement has been obtained, the children 
 write it under the question. 
 
 Teacher dictates, — " Did she live alone ? " 
 
 Pupils write the question and supply an answer, as, " She had 
 many children." 
 
 Teacher dictates, — " How many children had she? " 
 
 Pupils write the question and supply the answer, as, " She had 
 so many children she did not know what to do." 
 
 The answers to the questions read : 
 
 An old woman lived in a shoe. 
 
 She had many children. 
 
 She had so many children she did not know what to do. 
 
 Note that the answers form a unit, a complete 
 story. The teacher's conscious aim at this result 
 determined her questions and the satisfactory an- 
 swers of the children. A similar purpose — that 
 of securing connected and complete thought — 
 should dominate and determine practically all 
 language exercises, oral and written, no matter what 
 minor and immediate purposes these exercises may 
 be designed to serve. Every exercise of this kind 
 is training the child in sustained, purposeful thought, 
 in thought that gets somewhere. Much use of 
 
264 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 miscellaneous, unconnected sentences is positively 
 demoralizing. 
 
 Rhyme 6 (277). Tell pupils the following story: 
 
 Little Bo- Peep 
 
 One day Bo- Peep drove her sheep into the meadow. Then 
 she sat down to rest. Soon she fell fast asleep. 
 
 When she awoke, it was nearly dark. Not a sheep was in sight. 
 Every one had run away. 
 
 This story may be used as follows : 
 
 1. Pupils may reproduce it, (a) orally; (5) in 
 writing. 
 
 2. It may be given as an unstudied dictation ex- 
 ercise. 
 
 Pupils should be expected to reproduce it in writ- 
 ing or to write it from dictation only after it is rea- 
 sonably sure that they can spell all the words. They 
 may have mastered these in previous study of the 
 rhyme, Little Bo-Peep. 
 
 3. Have the children tell or write original quota- 
 tions telling what Bo-Peep said when she drove her 
 sheep into the meadow (" Here, little sheep, is good 
 sweet grass. Eat all you want," said Bo-Peep); 
 what she said when she sat down to rest (" I am so 
 tired. I will rest for a little while," said Bo-Peep) ; 
 what she said when she awoke and found it was 
 getting dark; what she said when she found her 
 sheep were gone. If this is to be a written exercise, 
 have the pupils give each sentence aloud before 
 writing it. 
 
SUGGESTIONS FOR USING STORIES AND RHYMES 265 
 
 4. Let the children tell or write original stories 
 of what happened to the sheep. Where were they ? 
 Did they have a good time ? Did they come back 
 to Bo-Peep or did she have to find them ? Did Bo- 
 Peep ever lose her sheep again ? 
 
 5. The story of Bo-Peep may be dramatized. 
 Rhyme 7 (277). This rhyme is given in dialogue 
 
 form. 
 
 1. Have the children rewrite it in complete sen- 
 tences, using quotations. 
 
 The dog said, " Bow, wow, wow ! " 
 
 The man said, " " 
 
 The dog answered, " ..." 
 
 2. Have pupils tell or write a story telling why 
 the man spoke to the dog, where the dog was, and 
 what happened, something like this : 
 
 One day a man saw a little dog limping down the street. 
 (What had happened to the little dog? How was he hurt?) 
 
 The man said, " Poor little doggie, come here." 
 
 The little dog crept to the man's feet and held up his lame 
 paw. 
 
 " You poor little dog," said the man again. " I wonder whose 
 dog you are? " 
 
 The little dog barked. He tried to say, " I am little Tommy 
 Tucker's dog." 
 
 Did the man understand the dog ? What did he do for the 
 dog? End the story, telling how the dog got back to his little 
 master. 
 
 3. Have the pupils tell the story orally or in 
 writing as the dog might tell it. 
 
266 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Rhyme 8 (277). 1. After the pupils have studied 
 the rhyme by copying, studying aloud or silently the 
 spelling, punctuation, and capitalization, or after they 
 have written it from memory, dictate as follows: 
 
 This little pig said, " I went to market." 
 " I stayed at home," cried this little pig. 
 This little pig saifl, " I had roast beef." 
 " I had none," cried this little pig. 
 
 2. Let the pupils make up stories with these 
 titles: 
 
 (a) Why the First Little Pig Went to Market 
 
 (b) Why the Second Little Pig Stayed at Home 
 (V) Why the Third Little Pig had Roast Beef 
 
 (d) Why the Fourth Little Pig had None 
 
 (e) How the Fifth Little Pig got Lost 
 
 Let each pupil select one of the above subjects 
 and make up the story about it. 
 
 Rhyme 9 (278). After the rhyme has been 
 learned, ask such questions as: 
 
 What do you think of a boy who would eat a Christmas pie 
 alone? Why did he go off into a corner by himself? (That no 
 one might see him and ask for a piece?) What do you think of 
 his manners? (He put in his thumb and pulled out a plum.) 
 Was he a great boy ? What kind of a boy was he ? (A greedy, 
 rude boy.) 
 
 Now let the pupils tell or write the story of 
 Jack Homer, the Greedy Boy, 
 
 Once there was a little boy named Jack Horner. He was a 
 very greedy boy. One time he had a fine Christmas pie given to 
 him. It was a big pie, just full of juicy plums. 
 
SUGGESTIONS FOR USING STORIES AND RHYMES 267 
 
 What did he do? What did he say? Was he punished for 
 being so greedy and so rude ? How? 
 
 10 (278). The Fable of the Wolf and the Goat. 
 
 1. Study aloud for spelling, punctuation, and 
 capitalization; or have pupils study alone, perhaps 
 copying. 
 
 2. Dictate after study. 
 
 3. If (1) and (2) are omitted, dictate to test the 
 pupils' knowledge of the language forms used in the 
 fable. 
 
 4. Have the fable reproduced, either orally or in 
 writing, after one reading. 
 
 5. Have the children make original fables con- 
 taining the same teaching, using this fable as a type 
 form. Here are a few suggestions : 
 
 (a) The Cat and the Robin 
 
 Robin looking for insects in tree ; cat tells him to come down, 
 as there are many good fat worms in the grass ; robin answers, 
 " I would rather have little insects than be eaten by you." 
 
 (3) The Fox and the Hen 
 
 Hen roosting high on a dead tree; fox tells her the wind is 
 strong and cold ; asks her to come into his warm den. Finish by 
 telling hen's answer. 
 
 (V) Have the children find other titles and make original fables 
 from them. 
 
 6. Change the stories, having the robin listen 
 to the cat, the hen to the fox. Let fables be 
 
268 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 finished with some such expression as, " It would 
 have been better to rest in safety on the cold bough 
 than to be eaten by a fox in his warm den." 
 
 11 (278). The Fable of the Boys and the Frogs. 
 
 1. The suggestions for the treatment of fable 10, 
 The Wolf and the Goat, apply equally here. 
 
 2. Have pupils write or tell these stories: 
 
 (a) The story of a particular frog who had a child or a wife 
 killed by a stone. 
 
 (b) The story one of the boys told his mother on his return, 
 ending with the resolve of the boy never to stone frogs again. 
 
 (c) The story of a dream one of the boys had — that he was 
 a frog stoned by some boys. 
 
 12 (278). The First Forget-Me-Not. 
 
 For ways in which this story may be used see 
 1, 2, 3, 4, under 10 (p. 267). 
 
 Give pupils the story in the form of the poem. 
 
 The Forget-Me-Not 
 
 When to flowers so beautiful 
 
 The Father gave a name, 
 Back came a little blue-eyed one, — 
 
 All timidly she came, — 
 And standing at the Father's feet, 
 
 And gazing on His face, 
 She said in low and timid voice, — 
 
 Yet with a gentle grace, — 
 " Dear Lord, the name thou gavest me, 
 
 Alas ! I have forgot ! " 
 The Father kindly looked on her, 
 
 And said, " Forget-Me-Not." 
 
POEMS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK 269 
 
 This poem may be memorized by the children, 
 then written from memory. 
 
 Tell any other stories you may know of the origin 
 of the forget-me-not. 
 
 II. Poems for Additional Work 
 
 The following carefully selected list of poems fur- 
 nish varied and excellent material for use on many 
 occasions and for different purposes. It is thought 
 best not to attempt any definite directions for the 
 use of these poems. You, the teacher, will be 
 the best judge of this matter. What poems do you 
 especially like ? Which ones do you think your 
 children would appreciate ? Which one especially 
 fits in with the work or the occasion ? Your answer 
 to these and similar questions will determine the 
 use that you will make of this material. 
 
 Determining your course in this way you will 
 probably make thorough study with the children of 
 a considerable number of these poems; many of 
 them the children will commit to memory. Per- 
 haps, first and last, you will at least read all of them 
 to your class. They contain a wealth of literary 
 material which may enrich the thought, the imagi- 
 nation, the sentiments, and the choice vocabulary of 
 pupils — or of any one — who will live with them 
 sympathetically. 
 
 The following brief and imperfect analysis and 
 partial classification of these poems in accordance 
 
270 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 with several purposes which they may be made to 
 serve will perhaps be of assistance. 
 
 i. Poems of information. A few of the poems 
 may be read on appropriate occasion for the sake of 
 the information which they contain. For examples, 
 12 in connection with history lessons; 15 when 
 studying boy life among the Indians. The poetic 
 form conveys the spirit as well as the mere fact. 
 
 2. Story-telling poems. Every one of the first 
 fifteen poems tells a story. The children may re- 
 produce these stories in prose, either orally or in 
 writing. If they are to write them, they should first 
 study the printed or written poem, that they may 
 master the spelling and any other forms that they 
 may need to use. Poems that cannot be put be- 
 fore the children in books may be written on the 
 blackboard, or hektograph copies may be made. 
 
 3. Poems that may serve as the basis of original 
 work, such as 1, 3, 10, 11, 17. For example, after 
 hearing 10, pupils may tell or write stories that 
 the ghost fairies might tell. 
 
 4. Nature poems. The poems 16-31 may be 
 used in connection with many phases of nature 
 study. 
 
 5. Character-building poems, or poems that teach 
 moral lessons. There will be no lack of occasions 
 when some one of the following poems can be used 
 to advantage: 2, 4-9, 14, 15, 38-42. 
 
 6. Poems for dramatizing. Several of the nar- 
 
POEMS FOR ADDITIONAL WORK 271 
 
 rative poems, like 2, 5, 6, 8, 9, n, 15, furnish good 
 material for dramatizing. Of course suitable prep- 
 aration must be made by turning the story of the 
 poem into a prose narrative, and telling it largely 
 in the form of conversation between the several 
 characters involved. 
 
 7. Poems for memorizing. Any of the poems 
 are worth memorizing. Encourage children to 
 memorize those that especially appeal to them. 
 Have each child memorize as many as he will 
 voluntarily. 
 
 1. A Good Play Robert Louis Stevenson 
 
 2. How the Leaves Come Down Susan Coolidge 
 
 3. The Land of Story Books . Robert Louis Stevenson 
 
 4. The Wind and the Moon . George Macdonald 
 
 5. The Happiest Land . . . Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 
 
 6. The Pied Piper of Hame tin . Robert Browning 
 
 7. Lucy Gray ; or, Solitude . . William Wordsworth 
 
 8. Goody Blake and Harry Gill William Wordsworth 
 
 9. The Leak in the Dike . . . Phoebe Cary 
 
 10. Ghost Fairies Frank Dempster Sherman 
 
 1 1 . Daisies Frank Dempster Sherman 
 
 12. Paul Revere 's Ride . . . Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 
 
 13. The Deacon's Masterpiece ; 
 
 or, the Wonderful One- 
 
 Hoss Shay Oliver Wendell Holmes 
 
 14. Little Red Riding Hood . . John Greenleaf Whittier 
 
 15. How the Robin Came . . John Greenleaf Whittier 
 
 16. April Fools Emily Huntington Miller 
 
 17. Windy Nights Robert Louis Stevenson 
 
 18. The Song of the Thrush . . Lucy Larcom 
 
 19. The Blue Bird Emily Huntington Miller 
 
272 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 20. Down to Sleep Helen Hunt Jackson 
 
 2 1 . Jack Frost Hannah Gould 
 
 22. Robert of Lincoln .... William Cullen Bryant 
 
 23. Sweet Peas John Keats 
 
 24. The Dove John Keats 
 
 25. The Night Wind .... Eugene Field 
 
 26. The Brook Alfred Tennyson 
 
 27. The Throstle Alfred Tennyson 
 
 28. The Rain Margaret Deland 
 
 29. Another Blue Day .... Thomas Carlyle 
 
 30. Wild Geese Celia Thaxter 
 
 31. Winter Song Emily Huntington Miller 
 
 32. A Dutch Lullaby .... Eugene Field 
 
 33. Shadow-Town Ferry . . . L. D. Rice 
 
 34. Lullaby to an Infant Child . Walter Scott 
 
 35. A Norse Lullaby .... Eugene Field 
 
 36. Sweet and Low Alfred Tennyson 
 
 37. The Sandman Marie Van Vorst 
 
 38. Pippa's Song (from "Pippa 
 
 Passes ") Robert Browning 
 
 39. Obedience Phcebe Cary 
 
 40. He Prayeth Best (from 
 
 "The Ancient Mariner") Samuel Coleridge 
 
 41. Work Alice Cary 
 
 42. A Song of Easter .... Celia Thaxter 
 
 43. Old Christmas Mary Howitt 
 
 44. Christmas Bells .... Henry Wadsworth Longfellow 
 
 III. Books 
 
 The following brief list of books furnishes a fund 
 of good literary material that children can use at 
 once in the various exercises called for in their 
 
 book, — in oral and written reproductions, in drama- 
 
BOOKS 273 
 
 tizing, in turning conversational stories into dialogue 
 form, in modelling " original " stories after type 
 stories, in the making of outlines, etc. These are 
 stories that children enjoy and appreciate, and 
 readily assimilate. They may be told or read to 
 the children by the teacher, or children may read 
 or tell them — after preparation — in turn. This 
 little library provides abundance of enjoyable silent 
 reading, as individual pupils have time and in- 
 clination. 
 
 Adventures of a Brownie Mrs. D. M. Craik 
 
 Adventures of Pinnochio, The . . . Carlo Lorenzini 
 
 Alice in Wonderland Lewis Carroll 
 
 Animal Story Book, The Andrew Lang 
 
 At the Back of the North Wind . . George McDonald 
 
 Beautiful Joe Marshall Saunders 
 
 Book of Legends Horace Scudder 
 
 Book of Saints and Friendly Beasts . Abbie F. Brown 
 
 Celtic Fairy Tales Joseph Jacobs 
 
 English Fairy Tales Joseph Jacobs 
 
 Fables - y£sop 
 
 Fairy Tales Hans Christian Anderst 
 
 Fifty Fatuous Stories Retold .... James Baldwin 
 
 Five Minute Stories Laura E. Richards 
 
 Household Fairy Tales Grimm Brothers 
 
 Household Stories Grimm Brothers 
 
 How to Tell Stories to Children . . Sara C. Bryant 
 
 Jungle Book, The Rudyard Kipling 
 
 Just So Stories Rudyard Kipling 
 
 Little La?ne Prince, The Mrs. D. M. Craik 
 
 Little Lord Fauntleroy Mrs. F. H. Burnett 
 
 Old Lndian Legends Zitkala-Sa 
 
274 TEACHER'S MANUAL 
 
 Peterkin Papers, The L. P. Hale 
 
 Pig Brother and Other Stories, The . Laura E. Richards 
 
 Second Jungle Book, The Rudyard Kipling 
 
 Sir Gibbie {parts) George Macdonald 
 
 Snow Baby J. D. Peary 
 
 Stories to Tell to Children .... Sara C. Bryant 
 
 Twilight Land Howard Pyle 
 
 Uncle Remus Joel C. Harris 
 
 Water Babies Charles Kingsley 
 
 Wonder Clock, The Howard Pyle 
 
 Wonderful Adventures of Nils, The . Selma Lagerlof 
 

VB 35153 
 
 575784 
 
 IB 
 
 7 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY